Specifications | Ford 2009 Fusion Automobile User Manual

Table of Contents
Introduction
Instrument Cluster
4
10
Warning lights and chimes
Gauges
10
14
Entertainment Systems
17
How to get going
AM/FM stereo with CD
AM/FM stereo with in-dash six CD
Auxiliary input jack (Line in)
USB port
Satellite radio information
Navigation system
SYNC
Climate Controls
Manual heating and air conditioning
Automatic temperature control
Rear window defroster
Lights
Headlamps
Turn signal control
Bulb replacement
Driver Controls
Windshield wiper/washer control
Steering wheel adjustment
Power windows
Mirrors
Speed control
Moon roof
Message center
17
21
29
37
38
42
44
44
45
45
47
52
53
53
57
58
68
68
69
72
74
75
80
81
1
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Table of Contents
Locks and Security
91
Keys
Locks
Anti-theft system
91
93
106
Seating and Safety Restraints
Seating
Safety restraints
Airbags
Child restraints
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Tire information
Tire inflation
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Vehicle loading
Trailer towing
Recreational towing
Driving
112
112
121
135
150
166
166
168
181
187
191
191
193
Starting
Brakes
AdvanceTrac威
Traction Control™
Transmission operation
Reverse sensing system
193
198
200
204
206
213
Roadside Emergencies
221
Getting roadside assistance
Hazard flasher switch
Fuel pump shut-off switch
Fuses and relays
Changing tires
Wheel lug nut torque
Jump starting
Wrecker towing
2
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
221
222
223
223
230
235
236
242
Table of Contents
Customer Assistance
Reporting safety defects (U.S. only)
Reporting safety defects (Canada only)
244
250
251
Cleaning
252
Maintenance and Specifications
260
Engine compartment
Engine oil
Battery
Engine coolant
Fuel information
Air filter(s)
Part numbers
Maintenance product specifications and capacities
Engine data
262
265
270
272
279
295
297
299
302
Accessories
305
Index
307
All rights reserved. Reproduction by any means, electronic or mechanical
including photocopying, recording or by any information storage and retrieval
system or translation in whole or part is not permitted without written
authorization from Ford Motor Company. Ford may change the contents without
notice and without incurring obligation.
Copyright © 2008 Ford Motor Company
3
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Introduction
CONGRATULATIONS
Congratulations on acquiring your new Ford. Please take the time to get
well acquainted with your vehicle by reading this handbook. The more
you know and understand about your vehicle, the greater the safety and
pleasure you will derive from driving it.
For more information on Ford Motor Company and its products visit the
following website:
• In the United States: www.ford.com
• In Canada: www.ford.ca
• In Australia: www.ford.com.au
• In Mexico: www.ford.com.mx
Additional owner information is given in separate publications.
This Owner’s Guide describes every option and model variant available
and therefore some of the items covered may not apply to your
particular vehicle. Furthermore, due to printing cycles it may describe
options before they are generally available.
Remember to pass on this Owner’s Guide when reselling the vehicle. It
is an integral part of the vehicle.
WARNING: Fuel pump shut-off switch: In the event of an
accident the safety switch will automatically cut off the fuel
supply to the engine. The switch can also be activated through sudden
vibration (e.g. collision when parking). To reset the switch, refer to the
Fuel pump shut-off switch in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.
SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION
Warning symbols in this guide
How can you reduce the risk of personal injury to yourself or others? In
this guide, answers to such questions are contained in comments
highlighted by the warning triangle symbol. These comments should be
read and observed.
4
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Introduction
Warning symbols on your vehicle
When you see this symbol, it is
imperative that you consult the
relevant section of this guide before
touching or attempting adjustment
of any kind.
Protecting the environment
We must all play our part in
protecting the environment. Correct
vehicle usage and the authorized
disposal of waste, cleaning and
lubrication materials are significant
steps towards this aim. Information in this respect is highlighted in this
guide with the tree symbol.
CALIFORNIA Proposition 65 Warning
WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and
certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to
the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known
to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
PERCHLORATE MATERIAL
Certain components of this vehicle such as airbag modules, seat belt
pretensioners, and button cell batteries may contain Perchlorate Material
– Special handling may apply for service or vehicle end of life disposal.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
BREAKING-IN YOUR VEHICLE
Your vehicle does not need an extensive break-in. Try not to drive
continuously at the same speed for the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of
new vehicle operation. Vary your speed frequently in order to give the
moving parts a chance to break in.
Do not add friction modifier compounds or special break-in oils since
these additives may prevent piston ring seating. See Engine oil in the
Maintenance and Specifications chapter for more information on oil
usage.
5
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Introduction
SPECIAL NOTICES
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
For a detailed description of what is covered and what is not covered by
your vehicle’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty, refer to the Warranty
Guide/Customer Information Guide that is provided to you along with
your Owner’s Guide.
Special instructions
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic
controls.
WARNING: Please read the section Airbag Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) in the Seating and Safety Restraints
chapter. Failure to follow the specific warnings and instructions could
result in personal injury.
WARNING: Front seat mounted rear-facing child or infant seats
should NEVER be placed in front of an active passenger airbag.
Service Data Recording
Service data recorders in your vehicle are capable of collecting and
storing diagnostic information about your vehicle. This potentially
includes information about the performance or status of various systems
and modules in the vehicle, such as engine, throttle, steering or brake
systems. In order to properly diagnose and service your vehicle, Ford
Motor Company, Ford of Canada, and service and repair facilities may
access vehicle diagnostic information through a direct connection to your
vehicle when diagnosing or servicing your vehicle.
Event Data Recording
Other modules in your vehicle — event data recorders — are capable of
collecting and storing data during a crash or near crash event. The
recorded information may assist in the investigation of such an event.
The modules may record information about both the vehicle and the
occupants, potentially including information such as:
• how various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• whether or not the driver and passenger seatbelts were buckled;
• how far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or the
brake pedal;
6
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Introduction
• how fast the vehicle was traveling; and
• where the driver was positioning the steering wheel.
To access this information, special equipment must be directly connected
to the recording modules. Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada do
not access event data recorder information without obtaining consent,
unless pursuant to court order or where required by law enforcement,
other government authorities or other third parties acting with lawful
authority. Other parties may seek to access the information
independently of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada.
Cell phone use
The use of Mobile Communications Equipment has become increasingly
important in the conduct of business and personal affairs. However,
drivers must not compromise their own or others’ safety when using
such equipment. Mobile Communications can enhance personal safety
and security when appropriately used, particularly in emergency
situations. Safety must be paramount when using mobile communications
equipment to avoid negating these benefits.
Mobile Communication Equipment includes, but is not limited to cellular
phones, pagers, portable email devices, in-vehicle communications
systems, telematics devices and portable two-way radios.
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that
drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their
focus off the road. The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe
operation of their vehicle. Only use cell phones and other devices not
essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so.
Export unique (Non–United States/Canada) vehicle specific
information
For your particular global region, your vehicle may be equipped with
features and options that are different from the ones that are described
in this Owner’s Guide. A market unique supplement may be supplied
that complements this book. By referring to the market unique
supplement, if provided, you can properly identify those features,
recommendations and specifications that are unique to your vehicle. This
Owner’s Guide is written primarily for the U.S. and Canadian Markets.
Features or equipment listed as standard may be different on units built
for Export. Refer to this Owner’s Guide for all other required
information and warnings.
7
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Introduction
These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle.
Vehicle Symbol Glossary
Safety Alert
See Owner’s Guide
Fasten Safety Belt
Airbag - Front
Airbag - Side
Child Seat Lower
Anchor
Child Seat Tether
Anchor
Brake System
Anti-Lock Brake System
Parking Brake System
Brake Fluid Non-Petroleum Based
Parking Aid System
Stability Control System
Speed Control
Master Lighting Switch
Hazard Warning Flasher
Fog Lamps-Front
Fuse Compartment
Fuel Pump Reset
Windshield Wash/Wipe
Windshield
Defrost/Demist
Rear Window
Defrost/Demist
8
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Introduction
Vehicle Symbol Glossary
Power Windows
Front/Rear
Power Window Lockout
Child Safety Door
Lock/Unlock
Interior Luggage
Compartment Release
Panic Alarm
Engine Oil
Engine Coolant
Engine Coolant
Temperature
Do Not Open When Hot
Battery
Avoid Smoking, Flames,
or Sparks
Battery Acid
Explosive Gas
Fan Warning
Power Steering Fluid
Maintain Correct Fluid
Level
Service Engine Soon
Engine Air Filter
Passenger Compartment
Air Filter
Jack
Check Fuel Cap
Low Tire Pressure
Warning
MAX
MIN
9
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
WARNING LIGHTS AND CHIMES
Standard instrument cluster
Optional instrument cluster
Warning lights and gauges can alert you to a vehicle condition that may
become serious enough to cause extensive repairs. A warning light may
illuminate when a problem exists with one of your vehicle’s functions.
Many lights will illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure the
bulbs work. If any light remains on after starting the vehicle, refer to the
respective system warning light for additional information.
Service engine soon: The Service
engine soon indicator light
illuminates when the ignition is first
turned to the on position to check
10
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
the bulb and to indicate whether the vehicle is ready for
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing. Normally, the ⬙Service engine soon⬙
light will stay on until the engine is cranked, then turn itself off if no
malfunctions are present. However, if after 15 seconds the ⬙Service
engine soon⬙ light blinks eight times, it means that the vehicle is not
ready for I/M testing. See the Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance
(I/M) testing in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
Solid illumination after the engine is started indicates the On Board
Diagnostics System (OBD-II) has detected a malfunction. Refer to On
board diagnostics (OBD-II) in the Maintenance and Specifications
chapter. If the light is blinking, engine misfire is occurring which could
damage your catalytic converter. Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid
heavy acceleration and deceleration) and have your vehicle serviced
immediately by your authorized dealer.
WARNING: Under engine misfire conditions, excessive exhaust
temperatures could damage the catalytic converter, the fuel
system, interior floor coverings or other vehicle components, possibly
causing a fire.
Check fuel cap: Illuminates when
the fuel cap may not be properly
installed. Continued driving with
this light on may cause the Service
engine soon warning light to come
on, refer to Fuel filler cap in the
Maintenance and Specification chapter.
Brake system warning light: To
!
P
confirm the brake system warning
light is functional, it will
BRAKE
momentarily illuminate when the
ignition is turned to the on position
when the engine is not running, or in a position between on and start, or
by applying the parking brake when the ignition is turned to the on
position. If the brake system warning light does not illuminate at this
time, seek service immediately from your authorized dealer. Illumination
after releasing the parking brake indicates low brake fluid level or a
brake system malfunction and the brake system should be inspected
immediately by your authorized dealer.
11
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
WARNING: Driving a vehicle with the brake system warning
light on is dangerous. A significant decrease in braking
performance may occur. It will take you longer to stop the vehicle.
Have the vehicle checked by your authorized dealer. Driving extended
distances with the parking brake engaged can cause brake failure and
the risk of personal injury.
Anti-lock brake system: If the
ABS light stays illuminated or
ABS
continues to flash, a malfunction has
been detected, have the system
serviced immediately by your
authorized dealer. Normal braking is still functional unless the brake
warning light also is illuminated.
Airbag readiness: If this light fails
to illuminate when the ignition is
turned to on, continues to flash or
remains on, have the system
serviced immediately by your authorized dealer. A chime will also sound
when a malfunction in the supplemental restraint system has been
detected.
Safety belt: Reminds you to fasten
your safety belt. A Belt-Minder威
chime will also sound to remind you
to fasten your safety belt. Refer to
the Seating and Safety Restraints
chapter to activate/deactivate the Belt-Minder威 chime feature.
Charging system: Illuminates when
the battery is not charging properly.
Engine oil pressure: Illuminates
when the oil pressure falls below the
normal range, refer to Engine oil in
the Maintenance and
Specifications chapter.
12
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
AdvanceTrac威/Traction
Control™ (if equipped):
Illuminates when the
AdvanceTrac威/Traction Control™ is
active. If the light remains on, have
the system serviced immediately,
refer to the Driving chapter for more information.
Low tire pressure warning:
Illuminates when your tire pressure
is low. If the light remains on at
start up or while driving, the tire
pressure should be checked. Refer
to Inflating your tires in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter. When
the ignition is first turned to on, the light will illuminate for three
seconds to ensure the bulb is working. If the light does not turn on or
begins to flash, have the system inspected by your authorized dealer. For
more information on this system, refer to Tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter.
Low fuel (if equipped):
Illuminates when the fuel level in
the fuel tank is at or near empty
(refer to Fuel gauge in this
chapter).
Speed control: Illuminates when
the speed control is engaged. Turns
off when the speed control system
is disengaged.
Door ajar (if equipped):
Illuminates when the ignition is in
the on position and any door or
decklid is open.
Anti-theft system: Flashes when
the SecuriLock™ Passive Anti-theft
System has been activated.
13
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Throttle Control/Transmission:
Illuminates when a powertrain or a
AWD fault has been detected.
Contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
Turn signal: Illuminates when the
left or right turn signal or the
hazard lights are turned on. If the
indicators flash faster, check for a burned out bulb.
High beams: Illuminates when the
high beam headlamps are turned on.
Key-in-ignition warning chime: Sounds when the key is left in the
ignition in the off or accessory position and the driver’s door is opened.
Headlamps on warning chime: Sounds when the headlamps or parking
lamps are on, the ignition is off (the key is not in the ignition) and the
driver’s door is opened.
Parking brake on: Sounds when the parking brake is left on and driven.
If the warning stays on after the park brake is off, contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
GAUGES
14
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Speedometer: Indicates the
current vehicle speed.
Engine coolant temperature
gauge: Indicates engine coolant
temperature. At normal operating
temperature, the needle will be in
the normal range (between “H” and
“C”). If it enters the red section,
the engine is overheating. Stop
the vehicle as soon as safely
possible, switch off the engine and let the engine cool.
WARNING: Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the
engine is running or hot.
Fuel gauge: Indicates
approximately how much fuel is left
in the fuel tank (when the ignition
is in the on position). The fuel
gauge may vary slightly when the
vehicle is in motion or on a grade.
The FUEL icon and arrow indicates
which side of the vehicle the fuel
filler door is located.
E
F
Refer to Filling the tank in the Maintenance and Specifications
chapter for more information.
15
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Tachometer: Indicates the engine
speed in revolutions per minute.
Driving with your tachometer
pointer continuously at the top of
the scale may damage the engine.
Odometer: Registers the total miles (kilometers) of the vehicle.
• Without Message center
• With Message center
Refer to Message center in the
Driver Controls chapter on how to
switch the display from Metric to
English.
Trip odometer: Registers the miles (kilometers) of individual journeys.
• Without Message center
Tap on the TRIP/RESET button to
toggle the display between the trip
and the odometer. Holding the
TRIP/RESET button for two seconds
or more will reset the trip odometer
to zero.
• With Message center
Press and release the message
center INFO button until “TRIP”
appears in the display (this
represents the trip mode). Press the
control again to select Trip A and Trip B features. Press and hold the
RESET button for two seconds to reset.
16
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
AUDIO SYSTEMS
Quick start — How to get going
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that
drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their
focus off the road. The drivers primary responsibility is the safe
operation of their vehicle. Only use cell phones and other devices not
essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so.
Listening to the radio
1. If the audio system is off, press
VOL-PUSH to turn the radio on.
Turn VOL-PUSH to adjust the
volume.
Note: The system may take a few
moments to turn on.
2. Press AM/FM repeatedly to
choose between AM/FM1/FM2
frequency bands.
/
to manually go
3. Press
up/down the frequency band.
SEEK
to search
Press
down/up the chosen frequency band
for the next strongest station.
To disengage SEEK mode,
/
.
press
4. Once you are tuned to the
desired station, press and hold a
memory preset (1–6) to save the
station. PRESET SAVED will appear on the display and the sound will
return signifying the station has been saved. You can save up to six
stations in each frequency band — six in AM, six in FM1 and six in FM2.
To access your saved stations, press the corresponding memory preset.
The memory preset # and the station frequency will appear on the
display.
17
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Listening to satellite radio (if equipped)
1. If the audio system is turned off,
press VOL-PUSH to turn the radio
on. Turn VOL-PUSH to adjust the
volume.
Note: The system may take a few
moments to turn on.
2. Press AUX repeatedly to cycle
through auxiliary audio sources.
Select SAT1, SAT2 or SAT3 to listen
to satellite radio.
SEEK, SEEK
to
3. Press
access the previous or next satellite
channel.
You may also seek by music
category. For further information, refer to CATEGORY listing under the
MENU control on your specific audio system.
4. Once you are tuned to the
desired channel, press and hold a
memory preset (1–6) to save the
channel. PRESET SAVED will appear on the display and the sound will
return signifying the station has been saved. You can save up to six
channels in each — six in SAT1, six in SAT2, and six in SAT3.
To access your saved channels, press the corresponding memory preset.
The memory preset # and the channel name will appear on the display.
Listening to a CD/MP3 (if equipped)
1. If the audio system is turned off,
press VOL-PUSH to turn the radio
on. Turn VOL-PUSH to adjust the
volume.
Note: The system may take a few
moments to turn on.
2. Press CD to enter CD mode. If a
disc is already loaded into the
system, CD play will begin where it
ended last.
18
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
For a single CD system, if a disc
is not already loaded, insert only
one, label side up into the CD slot.
LOADING CD and READING DISC will appear in the display. The first
track on the disc will begin playing.
For an in-dash six CD system, if
a disc is not already loaded, press
LOAD. Select a slot number using
memory presets 1–6. When the
display reads LOAD CD#, load the
desired disc, label side up. If you do not choose a slot within five
seconds, the system will choose for you. Once loaded, the first track will
begin to play.
To auto load up to 6 discs, press and hold LOAD until the display
reads AUTOLOAD#. Load the desired disc, label side up. The system will
prompt you to load discs for the remaining available slots. Insert the
discs, one at a time, label side up, when prompted. Once loaded, the last
loaded disc will begin to play.
Note: An MP3 disc with folders will show F001 (folder #) T001 (track #)
in the display. An MP3 disc without folders will show T001 (track#) in
the display. Refer to MP3 track and folder structure later in this
chapter for further information.
3. In CD/MP3 mode, you can access the following features:
SEEK, SEEK
to
Press
access the previous/next tracks.
Press and hold REW to manually
reverse in a CD/MP3 track.
Press and hold FF to manually
advance in a CD/MP3 track.
While in folder mode, press
FOLDER to access the previous
folder on MP3 discs, if available.
19
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
While in folder mode, press
to access the next
FOLDER
folder on MP3 discs, if available.
Press SHUFFLE to engage shuffle
mode. SHUFFLE ON will appear in
the display. If you wish to engage
shuffle mode right away, press SEEK to begin random play. Otherwise,
random play will begin when the current track is finished playing. CD
SHUF will appear in the display.
To disengage, press SHUFFLE again. SHUFFLE OFF will appear in the
display.
Note: In track mode, all tracks on the current disc will shuffle in
random order. In MP3 folder mode, the system will randomly play all
tracks within the current folder.
/
(play/pause) when a
Press
CD/MP3 is playing to pause the disc.
CD PAUSE will appear in the
display. Press again to resume play.
4. For a single CD system,
to eject the current disc.
press
The display will read CD EJECT.
For an in-dash six CD system,
and then select the
press
correct slot number using memory presets 1–6. When ready, the system
will eject the disc and the display will read REMOVE CD. If the disc is
not removed in 15 seconds, the system will reload the disc.
until the system
To auto eject up to 6 discs, press and hold
begins ejecting all loaded discs. If the discs are not removed, the system
will reload the discs.
20
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
AM/FM Single CD/MP3 satellite compatible sound system
(if equipped)
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that
drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their
focus off the road. The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe
operation of their vehicle. Only use cell phones and other devices not
essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so.
Accessory delay: Your vehicle is equipped with accessory delay. With
this feature, the window switches, radio and moon roof (if equipped)
may be used for up to ten minutes after the ignition is turned off or until
either front door is opened.
/
(Tuner): Press to
1.
manually go up or down the radio
frequency. Also use in menu mode
to select various settings.
21
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), press
/
to tune to the
next/previous channel.
In CATEGORY MODE, press
/
to scroll through the list of
available SIRIUS channel Categories (Pop, Rock, News, etc.). Refer to
Category under Menu for further information.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS subscription.
Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
2.
(Phone): If your vehicle is
equipped with SYNC, press to
access SYNC PHONE features. Refer
to your SYNC supplement for further information.
If your vehicle is not equipped with SYNC, the display will read NO
PHONE.
3. MENU: Press repeatedly to
access the following settings:
SATELLITE RADIO MENU (if equipped): Press MENU when satellite
radio mode is active to access. Press OK to enter into the satellite radio
/
to cycle through the following options:
menu. Press
• CATEGORY: Press OK to enter category mode. Press
/
to
scroll through the list of available SIRIUS channel Categories (Pop,
Rock, News, etc.) Press OK when the desired category appears in the
display. After a category is selected, press SEEK to search for that
specific category of channels only (i.e. ROCK). You may also select
CATEGORY ALL to seek all available SIRIUS categories and channels.
Press OK to close and return to the main menu.
• SAVE SONG: Press OK to save the currently playing song’s title in
the system’s memory. (If you try to save something other than a song,
CANT SAVE will appear in the display.) When the chosen song is
playing on any satellite radio channel, the system will alert you with
an audible prompt. Press OK while SONG ALERT is in the display and
the system will take you to the channel playing the desired song. You
can save up to 20 song titles. If you attempt to save more than 20
titles, the display will read REPLACE SONG? Press OK to access the
/
to cycle through the saved titles. When
saved titles and press
the song title appears in the display that you would like to replace,
press OK. SONG REPLACED will appear in the display.
22
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
• DELETE SONG: Press OK to delete a song from the system’s
memory. Press
/
to cycle through the saved songs. When the
song appears in the display that you would like to delete, press OK.
The song will appear in the display for confirmation. Press OK again
and the display will read SONG DELETED. If you do not want to
delete the currently listed song, press
/
to select either
RETURN or CANCEL.
Note: If there are no songs presently saved, the display will read NO
SONGS.
• DELETE ALL SONGS: Press OK to delete all song’s from the
system’s memory. The display will read ARE YOU SURE ? Press OK to
confirm deletion of all saved songs and the display will read ALL
DELETED.
Note: If there are no songs presently saved, the display will read NO
SONGS.
• ENABLE ALERTS / DISABLE ALERTS: Press OK to enable/disable
the satellite alert status which alerts you when your selected songs are
playing on a satellite radio channel. (The system default is disabled.)
SONG ALERTS ENABLED/DISABLED will appear in the display. The
menu listing will display the opposite state. For example, if you have
chosen to enable the song alerts, the menu listing will read DISABLE
as the alerts are currently on, so your other option is to turn them off.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio
subscription. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
Setting the clock: If your vehicle is equipped with an in-dash clock,
refer to Clock in the Driver Controls chapter for instructions on how to
set the time.
If your vehicle is not equipped with an in-dash clock, press MENU until
SET HOURS or SET MINUTES appears in the display. Press
/
to
adjust the hours/minutes. Press OK to close and return to the main
menu.
AUTOSET: Press MENU until the display reads AUTOSET. Autoset
allows you to set the strongest local radio stations without losing your
/
/
original manually set preset stations for AM/FM1/FM2. Use
SEEK
to turn on/off.
When the six strongest stations are filled, the station stored in preset 1
will begin playing. If there are less than six strong stations, the system
will store the last one in the remaining presets. Press OK to close and
return to the main menu.
23
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
RBDS: Available only in FM mode. This feature allows you to search
RBDS-equipped stations for a certain category of music format:
CLASSIC, COUNTRY, INFORM, JAZZ/RB, ROCK, etc.
To activate, press MENU repeatedly until RBDS (ON/OFF) appears in
the display. Use
/
/
SEEK
to toggle RBDS ON/OFF. When
RBDS is OFF, you will not be able to search for RBDS equipped stations
or view the station name or type. Press OK to close and return to the
main menu.
To search for specific RBDS music categories: When the desired
category appears in the display, press
/
to find the desired type,
then press and release
SEEK
or press and hold SCAN to begin
the search.
To view the station name or type: When the desired category appears
in the display, press TEXT/SCAN to toggle between displaying the station
type (COUNTRY, ROCK, etc.) or the station name (WYCD, WXYZ, etc.).
BASS: Press MENU to reach the bass setting. Use
/
/
SEEK
to adjust. Press OK to close and return to the main
menu.
TREB (Treble): Press MENU to reach the treble setting.
Use
/
/
SEEK
to adjust. Press OK to close and return to
the main menu.
BAL (Balance): Press MENU to reach the balance setting.
Use
/
/
SEEK
to adjust the audio between the left (L) and
right (R) speakers. Press OK to close and return to the main menu.
FADE: Press MENU to reach the fade setting. Use
/
/
SEEK
to adjust the audio between the back (B) and front (F)
speakers. Press OK to close and return to the main menu.
SPEEDVOL (Speed sensitive volume, if equipped): Press MENU to
reach the SPEEDVOL setting. Radio volume automatically gets louder
with increasing vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise.
Use
/
/
SEEK
to adjust.
The default setting is off; increasing your vehicle speed will not change
the volume level. Press OK to close and return to the main menu.
Adjust 1–7: Increasing this setting from 1 (lowest setting) to 7 (highest
setting) allows the radio volume to automatically change slightly with
vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise.
24
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Recommended level is 1–3; SPEED OFF turns the feature off and level 7
is the maximum setting.
Track/Folder mode: Available only on MP3 discs in CD mode.
In track mode, press
SEEK
to scroll through all tracks on the
disc.
In folder mode, press
SEEK
to scroll through tracks within the
selected folder.
FOLDER
to access the previous/next folder (if available).
Press
Press OK to close and return to the main menu.
COMPRESS (Compression): Available only in CD/MP3 mode. Press
MENU until COMPRESS ON/OFF appears in the display.
/
/
SEEK
to toggle ON/OFF. When COMPRESS is ON,
Use
the system will bring the soft and loud CD passages together for a more
consistent listening level. Press OK to close and return to the main
menu.
4. AUX:Press repeatedly to cycle
through LINE IN (auxiliary audio
mode), SAT1, SAT2 and SAT3
modes (satellite radio, if equipped) and SYNC (if equipped).
For location and further information on auxiliary audio mode, refer to
Auxiliary input jack later in this chapter.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio
subscription. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
If your vehicle is equipped with SYNC, please refer to the SYNC
supplement for further information.
5. SEEK: In radio mode,
/
to access the
press
previous/next strong station.
/
to
In CD mode, press
access the previous/next CD track.
SEEK
to seek
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), press
to the previous/next channel. If a specific category is selected, (Jazz,
SEEK
to seek to the previous/next
Rock, News, etc.), press
channel in the selected category. Press and hold
SEEK
to fast
seek through the previous /next channels.
25
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
In TEXT MODE, press
SEEK
to view the previous/additional
display text.
SEEK
to select a category.
In CATEGORY MODE, press
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS subscription.
Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
/
OK:
6.
(Play/Pause): Press to pause the
CD that is playing. PAUSE will
appear in the display. Press again to return to playback mode.
OK: Use in various menu selections. Your vehicle may be equipped with
the SYNC system which has special phone and media features. For
further information, refer to the SYNC supplement.
7. SHUFFLE: Press SHUFFLE to
engage shuffle mode. SHUFFLE ON
will appear in the display. If you
wish to engage shuffle mode right away, press SEEK to begin random
play. Otherwise, random play will begin when the current track is
finished playing. CD SHUF will appear in the display.
To disengage, press SHUFFLE again. SHUFFLE OFF will appear in the
display.
Note: In track mode, all tracks on the current disc will shuffle in
random order. In MP3 folder mode, the system will randomly play all
tracks within the current folder.
: In folder mode,
8. FOLDER
press FOLDER
to access next
folder on MP3 discs, if available.
FOLDER: In folder mode,
9.
press
FOLDER to access the
previous folder on MP3 discs, if
available.
10. FF (Fast forward): Press FF
to manually advance in a CD/MP3
track.
11. REW (Rewind): Press REW to
manually reverse in a CD/MP3 track.
26
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
12. Memory presets: To set a
station, select the desired frequency
band, AM, FM1 or FM2. Tune to the
desired station. Press and hold a preset button until sound returns and
PRESET # SAVED appears in the display. You can save up to 18 stations,
six in AM, six in FM1 and FM2.
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), there are 18 available presets,
six each for SAT1, SAT2 and SAT3. To save satellite channels in your
memory presets, tune to the desired channel then press and hold a
preset control until sound returns.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio
subscription. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
13. TEXT/SCAN: In radio and
CD/MP3 mode, press and hold for
a brief sampling of radio stations or
CD tracks. Press again to stop.
In MP3 mode, press and release to display track title, artist name, and
disc title.
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), press and release to enter
TEXT MODE and display the current song title. While in TEXT MODE,
press again to scroll through the current song title, artist, channel
category and the SIRIUS long channel name.
In TEXT MODE, sometimes the display requires additional text to be
to view the
displayed. When the “>” indicator is active, press SEEK
SEEK
additional display text. When the “<” indicator is active, press
to view the previous display text.
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), press and hold to hear a brief
sampling of the next channels. Press again to stop. In CATEGORY
MODE, press SCAN to hear a brief sampling of the channels in the
selected category. Press again to stop.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio
subscription. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
14. AM/FM: Press to select
AM/FM1/FM2 frequency band.
27
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
15. ON/OFF/Volume: Press to turn
ON/OFF. Turn to increase/decrease
volume.
Note: If the volume is set above a
certain level and the ignition is
turned off, the volume will come back on at a “nominal” listening level
when the ignition switch is turned back on.
16. CD: Press to enter CD/MP3
mode. If a CD/MP3 is already loaded
into the system, CD/MP3 play will
begin where it ended last. If no CD is loaded, NO DISC will appear in the
display.
17.
CD.
(CD eject): Press to eject a
18. CD slot: Insert a CD label side
up in the CD slot.
28
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Premium/Audiophile AM/FM in-dash six CD/MP3 satellite
compatible sound system (if equipped)
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that
drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their
focus off the road. The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe
operation of their vehicle. Only use cell phones and other devices not
essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so.
Accessory delay: Your vehicle is equipped with accessory delay. With
this feature, the window controls, radio and moon roof (if equipped) may
be used for up to ten minutes after the ignition is turned off or until
either front door is opened.
/
(Tune/Disc selector):
1.
In radio mode, press to manually
) or down (
) the
go up (
radio frequency. Press and hold for
a fast advance through radio frequencies.
In menu mode, use to select various settings.
In CD/MP3 mode, press to select the desired disc.
29
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), press
/
to tune to the
next/previous channel.
In CATEGORY MODE, press
/
to scroll through the list of
available SIRIUS channel Categories (Pop, Rock, News, etc.). Refer to
Category Mode under Menu for further information.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio
subscription. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
2.
(Phone): If your vehicle is
equipped with SYNC, press to
access SYNC PHONE features. Refer
to your SYNC supplement for further information.
If your vehicle is not equipped with SYNC, the display will read NO
PHONE.
3. MENU: Press repeatedly to
access the following settings:
SATELLITE RADIO MENU (if equipped): Press MENU when satellite
radio mode is active to access. Press OK to enter into the satellite radio
/
to cycle through the following options:
menu. Press
• CATEGORY: Press OK to enter category mode. Press
/
to
scroll through the list of available SIRIUS channel Categories (Pop,
Rock, News, etc.) Press OK when the desired category appears in the
display. After a category is selected, press SEEK to search for that
specific category of channels only (i.e. ROCK). You may also select
CATEGORY ALL to seek all available SIRIUS categories and channels.
Press OK to close and return to the main menu.
• SAVE SONG: Press OK to save the currently playing song’s title in
the system’s memory. (If you try to save something other than a song,
CANT SAVE will appear in the display.) When the chosen song is
playing on any satellite radio channel, the system will alert you with
an audible prompt. Press OK while SONG ALERT is in the display and
the system will take you to the channel playing the desired song. You
can save up to 20 song titles. If you attempt to save more than 20
titles, the display will read REPLACE SONG? Press OK to access the
/
to cycle through the saved titles. When
saved titles and press
the song title appears in the display that you would like to replace,
press OK. SONG REPLACED will appear in the display.
30
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
• DELETE SONG: Press OK to delete a song from the system’s
memory. Press
/
to cycle through the saved songs. When the
song appears in the display that you would like to delete, press OK.
The song will appear in the display for confirmation. Press OK again
and the display will read SONG DELETED. If you do not want to
/
to select either
delete the currently listed song, press
RETURN or CANCEL.
Note: If there are no songs presently saved, the display will read NO
SONGS.
• DELETE ALL SONGS: Press OK to delete all song’s from the
system’s memory. The display will read ARE YOU SURE ? Press OK to
confirm deletion of all saved songs and the display will read ALL
DELETED.
Note: If there are no songs presently saved, the display will read NO
SONGS.
• ENABLE ALERTS / DISABLE ALERTS: Press OK to enable/disable
the satellite alert status which alerts you when your selected songs are
playing on a satellite radio channel. (The system default is disabled.)
SONG ALERTS ENABLED/DISABLED will appear in the display. The
menu listing will display the opposite state. For example, if you have
chosen to enable the song alerts, the menu listing will read DISABLE
as the alerts are currently on, so your other option is to turn them off.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio
subscription. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
Setting the clock: If your vehicle is equipped with an in-dash clock,
refer to Clock in the Driver Controls chapter for instructions on how to
set the time.
If your vehicle is not equipped with an in-dash clock, press MENU until
/
to
SET HOURS or SET MINUTES appears in the display. Press
adjust. Press OK to close and return to the main menu.
AUTOSET: Press MENU until the display reads AUTOSET. Autoset
allows you to set the strongest local radio stations without losing your
/
/
original manually set preset stations for AM/FM1/FM2. Use
SEEK
to turn on/off.
When the six strongest stations are filled, the station stored in preset 1
will begin playing. If there are less than six strong stations, the system
will store the last one in the remaining presets. Press OK to close and
return to the main menu.
31
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
RBDS: Available only in FM mode. This feature allows you to search
RBDS-equipped stations for a certain category of music format:
CLASSIC, COUNTRY, INFORM, JAZZ/RB, ROCK, etc.
To activate, press MENU repeatedly until RBDS (ON/OFF) appears in
the display. Use
/
/
SEEK
to toggle RBDS ON/OFF. When
RBDS is OFF, you will not be able to search for RBDS equipped stations
or view the station name or type. Press OK to close and return to the
main menu.
To search for specific RBDS music categories: When the desired
category appears in the display, press
/
to find the desired type,
then press and release
SEEK
or press and hold SCAN to begin
the search.
To view the station name or type: When the desired category appears
in the display, press TEXT/SCAN to toggle between displaying the station
type (COUNTRY, ROCK, etc.) or the station name (WYCD, WXYZ, etc.).
BASS: Press MENU to reach the bass setting. Use
/
/
SEEK
to adjust. Press OK to close and return to the main
menu.
TREB (Treble): Press MENU to reach the treble setting.
Use
/
/
SEEK
to adjust. Press OK to close and return to
the main menu.
BAL (Balance): Press MENU to reach the balance setting.
Use
/
/
SEEK
to adjust the audio between the left (L) and
right (R) speakers. Press OK to close and return to the main menu.
FADE: Press MENU to reach the fade setting. Use
/
/
SEEK
to adjust the audio between the back (B) and front (F)
speakers. Press OK to close and return to the main menu.
SPEEDVOL (Speed sensitive volume, if equipped): Press MENU to
reach the SPEEDVOL setting. Radio volume automatically gets louder
with increasing vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise.
/
/
SEEK
to adjust. Press OK to close and return to
Use
the main menu.
The default setting is off; increasing your vehicle speed will not change
the volume level.
Adjust 1–7: Increasing this setting from 1 (lowest setting) to 7 (highest
setting) allows the radio volume to automatically change slightly with
vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise.
32
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Recommended level is 1–3; SPEED OFF turns the feature off and level 7
is the maximum setting.
Track/Folder mode: Available only on MP3 discs in CD mode.
SEEK
to scroll through all tracks on the
In track mode, press
disc
SEEK
to scroll through tracks within the
In folder mode, press
selected folder.
FOLDER, FOLDER
to access the previous/next folder (if
Press
available). Press OK to close and return to the main menu.
COMPRESS (Compression): Available only in CD/MP3 mode. Press
MENU until COMPRESS ON/OFF appears in the display.
/
/
SEEK
to toggle ON/OFF. When COMPRESS is ON,
Use
the system will bring the soft and loud CD passages together for a more
consistent listening level. Press OK to close and return to the main
menu.
ALL SEATS (Occupancy mode): Available on Audiophile audios only.
/
/
SEEK
to select and optimize sound for ALL
Use
SEATS, DRIVERS SEAT or REAR SEATS. Press OK to close and return
to the main menu.
4. AUX: Press repeatedly to cycle
through LINE IN (auxiliary audio
mode), SAT1, SAT2 and SAT3
(satellite radio, if equipped), and SYNC (if equipped). To return to radio
mode, press AM/FM.
For location and further information on auxiliary audio mode, refer to
Auxiliary input jack later in this chapter.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio
subscription. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
If your vehicle is equipped with SYNC, please refer to the SYNC
supplement for further information.
5. Seek: In radio and CD/MP3
mode, press to access the previous
) or next (
) strong station
(
or track.
33
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), press
SEEK
to seek
to the previous/next channel. If a specific category is selected, (Jazz,
SEEK
to seek to the previous/next
Rock, News, etc.), press
SEEK
to fast
channel in the selected category. Press and hold
seek through the previous / next channels.
SEEK
to view the previous/additional
In TEXT MODE, press
display text.
SEEK
to select a category.
In CATEGORY MODE, press
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS subscription.
Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
/
OK:
6.
(Play/Pause): Press to pause the
CD that is playing. PAUSE will
appear in the display. Press again to return to playback mode.
OK: Use in various menu selections. Your vehicle may be equipped with
the SYNC system which has special phone and media features. For
further information, refer to the SYNC supplement.
7. SHUFFLE: Press SHUFFLE to
engage shuffle mode. SHUFFLE ON
will appear in the display. If you
wish to engage shuffle mode right away, press SEEK to begin random
play. Otherwise, random play will begin when the current track is
finished playing. CD SHUF will appear in the display.
To disengage, press SHUFFLE again. SHUFFLE OFF will appear in the
display.
Note: In track mode, all tracks on the current disc will shuffle in
random order. In MP3 folder mode, the system will randomly play all
tracks within the current folder.
: In folder mode,
8. FOLDER
press FOLDER
to access next
folder on MP3 discs, if available.
FOLDER: In folder mode,
9.
press
FOLDER to access the
previous folder on MP3 discs, if
available.
34
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
10. FF (Fast forward): Press FF
to manually advance in a CD/MP3
track.
11. REW (Rewind): Press REW to
manually reverse in a CD/MP3 track.
12. Memory presets: To set a
station, select the desired frequency
band, AM, FM1 or FM2. Tune to the
desired station. Press and hold a preset button until sound returns and
PRESET # SAVED appears in the display. You can save up to 18 stations,
six in AM, six in FM1 and FM2.
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), there are 18 available presets,
six each for SAT1, SAT2 and SAT3. To save satellite channels in your
memory presets, tune to the desired channel then press and hold a
preset control until sound returns.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio
subscription. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
13. TEXT/SCAN: In radio and
CD/MP3 mode, press and hold for
a brief sampling of radio stations or
CD tracks. Press again to stop.
In MP3 mode, press and release to display track title, artist name, and
disc title.
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), press and release to enter
TEXT MODE and display the current song title. While in TEXT MODE,
press again to scroll through the current song title, artist, channel
category and the SIRIUS long channel name.
In TEXT MODE, sometimes the display requires additional text to be
to view the
displayed. When the “>” indicator is active, press SEEK
SEEK
additional display text. When the “<” indicator is active, press
to view the previous display text.
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), press and hold to hear a brief
sampling of the next channels. Press again to stop. In CATEGORY
MODE, press SCAN to hear a brief sampling of the channels in the
selected category. Press again to stop.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio
subscription. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
35
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
14. AM/FM: Press to select
AM/FM1/FM2 frequency band.
15. ON/OFF/Volume: Press to turn
ON/OFF. Turn to increase/decrease
volume.
Note:If the volume is set above a
certain level and the ignition is
turned off, the volume will come back on at a “nominal” listening level
when the ignition switch is turned back on.
16. CD: Press to enter CD/MP3
mode. If a disc is already loaded
into the system, CD/MP3 play will
begin where it ended last. If no CD is loaded, NO DISC will appear in the
display.
17. LOAD: To load a disc into the
system, press LOAD. Select a slot
number using memory presets 1–6.
When the display reads LOAD CD#,
load the desired disc, label side up.
If you do not choose a slot within 5 seconds, the system will choose for
you. Once loaded, the first track will begin to play.
To auto load up to 6 discs, press and hold LOAD until the display
reads AUTOLOAD#. Load the desired disc, label side up. The system will
prompt you to load discs for the remaining available slots. Insert the
discs, one at a time, label side up, when prompted. Once loaded, the disc
in preset #1 will begin to play.
Note: An MP3 disc with folders will show F001 (folder #) T001 (track #)
in the display. An MP3 disc without folders will show T001 (track#) in
the display. Refer to MP3 track and folder structure later in this
chapter for further information.
18.
(CD eject): To eject a disc
from the system, press
. Select
the correct slot number using
memory presets 1–6. When ready, the system will eject the disc and the
display will read REMOVE CD. If the disc is not removed in 15 seconds,
the system will reload the disc.
until the system begins
To auto eject up to 6 CDs, press and hold
ejecting all loaded discs. If the discs are not removed, the system will
reload the discs.
36
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
19. CD slot: When prompted by the
system, insert a CD label side up.
Auxiliary input jack (Line in)
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that
drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their
focus off the road. The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe
operation of their vehicle. Only use cell phones and other devices not
essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so.
Your vehicle is equipped with an
Auxiliary Input Jack (AIJ). The
Auxiliary Input Jack provides a way
to connect your portable music
player to the in-vehicle audio
system. This allows the audio from a
portable music player to be played
through the vehicle speakers with
high fidelity. To achieve optimal
performance, please observe the
following instructions when
attaching your portable music device to the audio system.
If your vehicle is equipped with a navigation system, refer to Auxiliary
input jack section in the Audio features chapter of your Navigation
system supplement.
Required equipment:
1. Any portable music player designed to be used with headphones
2. An audio extension cable with stereo male 1/8 in. (3.5 mm)
connectors at each end
To play your portable music player using the auxiliary input jack:
1. Begin with the vehicle parked and the radio turned off.
2. Ensure that the battery in your portable music player is new or fully
charged and that the device is turned off.
3. Attach one end of the audio extension cable to the headphone output
of your player and the other end of the audio extension cable to the AIJ
in your vehicle.
4. Turn the radio on, using either a tuned FM station or a CD loaded into
the system. Adjust the volume to a comfortable listening level.
37
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
5. Turn the portable music player on and adjust the volume to 1/2 the
volume.
6. Press AUX on the vehicle radio repeatedly until LINE, LINE IN or
SYNC LINE IN appears in the display.
You should hear audio from your portable music player, although it may
be low.
7. Adjust the sound on your portable music player until it reaches the
level of the FM station or CD by switching back and forth between the
AUX and FM or CD controls.
Troubleshooting:
1. Do not connect the audio input jack to a line level output. Line level
outputs are intended for connection to a home stereo and are not
compatible with the AIJ. The AIJ will only work correctly with devices
that have a headphone output with a volume control.
2. Do not set the portable music player’s volume level higher than is
necessary to match the volume of the CD or FM radio in your audio
system as this will cause distortion and will reduce sound quality. Many
portable music players have different output levels, so not all players
should be set at the same levels. Some players will sound best at full
volume and others will need to be set at a lower volume.
3. If the music sounds distorted at lower listening levels, turn the
portable music player volume down. If the problems persists, replace or
recharge the batteries in the portable music player.
4. The portable music player must be controlled in the same manner
when it is used with headphones as the AIJ does not provide control
(play, pause, etc.) over the attached portable music player.
5. For safety reasons, connecting or adjusting the settings on your
portable music player should not be attempted while the vehicle is
moving. Also, the portable music player should be stored in a secure
location, such as the center console or the glove box, when the vehicle is
in motion. The audio extension cable must be long enough to allow the
portable music player to be safely stored while the vehicle is in motion.
USB port (if equipped)
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that
drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their
focus off the road. The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe
operation of their vehicle. Only use cell phones and other devices not
essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so.
38
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Your vehicle may be equipped with a
USB port inside your center console.
This feature allows you to plug in
media playing devices, memory
sticks, and also to charge devices if
they support this feature. For
further information on this feature,
refer to Accessing and using your
USB port in the SYNC supplement
or Navigation system supplement.
GENERAL AUDIO INFORMATION
Radio frequencies:
AM and FM frequencies are established by the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications
Commission (CRTC). Those frequencies are:
AM: 530, 540–1700, 1710 kHz
FM: 87.7, 87.9–107.7, 107.9 MHz
Radio reception factors:
There are three factors that can affect radio reception:
• Distance/strength: The further you travel from an FM station, the
weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.
• Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, power lines, electric fences,
traffic lights and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.
• Station overload: When you pass a broadcast tower, a stronger signal
may overtake a weaker one and play while the weak station frequency
is displayed.
CD/CD player care
Do:
• Handle discs by their edges only.
(Never touch the playing
surface).
• Inspect discs before playing.
• Clean only with an approved CD
cleaner.
39
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
• Wipe discs from the center out.
Don’t:
• Expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods
of time.
• Clean using a circular motion.
CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4.75 in
(12 cm) audio compact discs only. Due to technical
incompatibility, certain recordable and re-recordable compact
discs may not function correctly when used in Ford CD players.
Do not use any irregular shaped
CDs or discs with a scratch
protection film attached.
CDs with homemade paper
(adhesive) labels should not be
inserted into the CD player as
the label may peel and cause the
CD to become jammed. It is
recommended that homemade
CDs be identified with
permanent felt tip marker rather
than adhesive labels. Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please
contact your authorized dealer for further information.
Audio system warranty and service
Refer to the Warranty Guide/Customer Information Guide for audio
system warranty information. If service is necessary, see your dealer or
qualified technician.
40
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
MP3 track and folder structure
Your MP3 system recognizes MP3 individual tracks and folder structure
as follows:
• There are two different modes for MP3 disc playback: MP3 track mode
(system default) and MP3 folder mode. For more information on track
and folder mode, refer to Sample MP3 structure in the following section.
• MP3 track mode ignores any folder structure on the MP3 disc. The
player numbers each MP3 track on the disc (noted by the .mp3 file
extension) from T001 to a maximum of T255.
Note: The maximum number of playable MP3 files may be less
depending on the structure of the CD and exact model of radio present.
• MP3 folder mode represents a folder structure consisting of one level
of folders. The CD player numbers all MP3 tracks on the disc (noted
by the .mp3 file extension) and all folders containing MP3 files, from
F001 (folder) T001 (track) to F253 T255.
• Creating discs with only one level of folders will help with navigation
through the disc files.
Sample MP3 structure
If you are burning your own MP3
discs, it is important to understand
how the system will read the
structures you create. While various
.mp3 1
1
files may be present, (files with
.mp3 2
extensions other than mp3), only
files with the .mp3 extension will be
.mp3 3
2
played. Other files will be ignored
by the system. This enables you to
.mp3 4
3
use the same MP3 disc for a variety
5
.mp3
of tasks on your work computer,
home computer and your in vehicle
system.
.mp3 6
4
.mp3 7
In track mode, the system will
display and play the structure as if
it were only one level deep (all .mp3
.doc
files will be played, regardless of
.ppt
being in a specific folder). In folder
.xls
mode, the system will only play the
.mp3 files in the current folder.
41
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Satellite radio information (if equipped)
Satellite radio channels: SIRIUS broadcasts a variety of music, news,
sports, weather, traffic and entertainment satellite radio channels. For
more information and a complete list of SIRIUS satellite radio channels,
visit www.sirius.com in the United States, www.sirius-canada.ca in
Canada, or call SIRIUS at 1–888–539–7474.
Satellite radio reception factors: To receive the satellite signal, your
vehicle has been equipped with a satellite radio antenna located on the
roof of your vehicle. The vehicle roof provides the best location for an
unobstructed, open view of the sky, a requirement of a satellite radio
system. Like AM/FM, there are several factors that can affect satellite
radio reception performance:
• Antenna obstructions: For optimal reception performance, keep the
antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other
material as far away from the antenna as possible.
• Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can
interfere with your reception.
• Station overload: When you pass a ground based broadcast repeating
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and result in an
audio mute.
Unlike AM/FM audible static, you will hear an audio mute when there is
a satellite radio signal interference. Your radio display may display NO
SIGNAL to indicate the interference.
SIRIUS satellite radio service: SIRIUS Satellite Radio is a subscription
based satellite radio service that broadcasts music, sports, news and
entertainment programming. A service fee is required in order to receive
SIRIUS service. Vehicles that are equipped with a factory installed
SIRIUS Satellite Radio system include:
• Hardware and limited subscription term, which begins on the date of
sale or lease of the vehicle.
• Use of online media player providing access to all SIRIUS music
channels over the internet using any computer connected to the
internet (U.S. customers only).
For information on extended subscription terms, contact SIRIUS at
1–888–539–7474.
Note: SIRIUS reserves the unrestricted right to change, rearrange, add or
delete programming including canceling, moving or adding particular
channels, and its prices, at any time, with or without notice to you. Ford
Motor Company shall not be responsible for any such programming changes.
42
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number (ESN): This 12–digit
Satellite Serial Number is needed to activate, modify or track your
satellite radio account. You will need this number when communicating
with SIRIUS. While in Satellite Radio mode, you can view this number on
the radio display by pressing AUX and Preset 1 control simultaneously.
Radio Display
ACQUIRING
SAT FAULT
INVALID CHNL
UNSUBSCRIBED
NO TEXT
Condition
Action Required
Radio requires more No action required. This
than two seconds to message should disappear
produce audio for
shortly.
the selected
channel.
Internal module or
If this message does not
clear within a short period
system failure
present.
of time, or with an ignition
key cycle, your receiver
may have a fault. See your
authorized dealer for
service.
Channel no longer
This previously available
available.
channel is no longer
available. Tune to another
channel. If the channel
was one of your presets,
you may choose another
channel for that preset
button.
Subscription not
Contact SIRIUS at
available for this
1–888–539–7474 to
channel.
subscribe to the channel
or tune to another
channel.
Artist information
Artist information not
not available.
available at this time on
this channel. The system is
working properly.
43
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Radio Display
NO TEXT
Condition
Song title
information not
available.
NO TEXT
Category
information not
available.
NO SIGNAL
Loss of signal from
the SIRIUS satellite
or SIRIUS tower to
the vehicle antenna.
UPDATING
Update of channel
programming in
progress.
Satellite service has
been deactivated by
SIRIUS Satellite
Radio.
CALL SIRIUS
1–888–539–7474
Action Required
Song title information not
available at this time on
this channel. The system is
working properly.
Category information not
available at this time on
this channel. The system is
working properly.
You are in a location that
is blocking the SIRIUS
signal (i.e., tunnel, under
an overpass, dense foliage,
etc). The system is
working properly. When
you move into an open
area, the signal should
return.
No action required. The
process may take up to
three minutes.
Call SIRIUS at
1–888–539–7474 to
re-activate or resolve
subscription issues.
NAVIGATION SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a navigation system. Refer to the
Navigation system supplement for further information.
SYNC (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with SYNC, a hands-free communications
and entertainment system with special phone and media features. For
more information, please refer to the SYNC supplement or to the SYNC
section in the Navigation system supplement (if equipped).
44
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Climate Controls
MANUAL HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
(IF EQUIPPED)
1. Temperature selection:
Controls the temperature of the
airflow in the vehicle.
2. Air flow selections: Controls
the direction of the airflow in the
vehicle. See the following for a brief
description on each control setting:
MAX A/C: Distributes recirculated
air through the instrument panel
vents only to cool the vehicle. This re-cooling of the interior air is more
economical and efficient. Recirculated air may also help reduce
undesirable odors from entering the vehicle.
: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents.
: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents and floor vents.
O (OFF): Outside air is shut out and the climate system is turned off.
: Distributes air through the floor vents. Note: You may notice a
small amount of air flowing from the demister and defroster vents.
: Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents, demisters
and floor vents.
: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster and
demister vents. Can be used to clear thin ice or fog from the windshield.
select another mode.
To exit
R
3.
Rear defroster: Press to activate/deactivate rear window
defroster. Refer to Rear window defroster in this section for more
information.
4.
Recirculated air: Press to activate/deactivate air recirculation
in the vehicle cabin. Recirculated air may reduce the amount of time to
cool down the interior of the vehicle and may also help reduce undesired
odors from reaching the interior of the vehicle. Recirculation engages
automatically with selection of MAX A/C or can be engaged manually in
any other airflow selection except defrost. Recirculation may turn off
automatically in all airflow selections except MAX A/C.
5. A/C: Press to activate/deactivate air conditioning. Use with
recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency. Engages
(defrost) and
(floor/defrost).
automatically in MAX A/C,
Cannot be disabled in MAX A/C mode.
45
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Climate Controls
6. Fan speed adjustment: Controls the volume of air circulated in the
vehicle.
Manual heating and air conditioning system operating tips
• To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather, place
the air flow selector in the
position.
• To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle: do not drive with the
airflow selector in the O (OFF) position or with recirculated air
engaged and A/C off.
• Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the
airflow to the back seats.
• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of
the windshield.
• To improve the A/C cool down, drive with the windows slightly open
for 2–3 minutes after start up or until the vehicle has been “aired out.”
During extreme high ambient temperatures when idling stationary for
extended periods of time in gear, it is recommended to run the A/C in the
MAX A/C mode, reduce blower fan speed from the highest setting and put
the vehicle’s transmission into the PARK gear position (automatic
transmission only) to continue to receive cool air from your A/C system.
For maximum cooling performance (MAX A/C mode):
• Move the temperature control selector to the coldest setting.
• Set the fan to the highest speed initially, then adjust to maintain
passenger comfort.
In the
and
modes:
• Move the temperature control selector to the coldest setting.
. Use
with A/C to provide
• Select A/C and recirculated air
colder airflow.
• Set the fan to the highest speed initially, then adjust to maintain
passenger comfort.
• To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather:
1. Select
2.
3.
4.
5.
.
Select A/C.
Set the temperature control to full heat.
Set the fan speed to the highest setting.
Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows.
46
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Climate Controls
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL (ATC) SYSTEM
(IF EQUIPPED)
Temperature conversion: To switch between Fahrenheit and Celsius: If
your vehicle is equipped with a full message center, refer to Setup menu
in the Message center section of the Driver Controls chapter for more
information. If your vehicle is equipped with a mini message center, see
your authorized dealer for temperature conversion.
MAX A/C setting: In order to achieve maximum cooling performance,
, A/C,
, and set the temperature to 60°F (16°C) and the
press
highest blower setting.
Defrost: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster
1.
and demister vents. Can be used to clear thin ice or fog from the
select another mode.
windshield. To exit
Fan speed control: Press to manually increase or decrease the
2.
fan speed. To return to automatic fan operation, press AUTO.
3. R
Rear defroster: Press to defrost the rear window. Refer to Rear
window defroster in this section for more information. If your vehicle is
equipped with both rear defroster and heated mirrors, the same button
will activate both.
47
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Climate Controls
4.
Recirculation control: Press to activate/deactivate air
recirculation in cabin. Recirculated air may reduce the amount of time to
cool down the interior of the vehicle and may also help reduce undesired
odors from reaching the interior of the vehicle. Recirculation can be
(defrost).
engaged manually in any other airflow selection except
Recirculation may turn off automatically in all airflow selections except
MAX A/C.
5. A/C control: Press to activate/deactivate air conditioning. Use with
recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency. Engages
(defrost) and
(floor/defrost).
automatically in AUTO,
: Distributes air through the windshield defroster ducts, demister
6.
outlets, and the front and rear seat floor ducts. The system will
automatically provide outside air to reduce window fogging.
7.
: Distributes air through the floor and rear seat floor ducts.
: Distributes air through the instrument panel and center console
8.
registers (if equipped) and the front and rear seat floor ducts.
: Distributes air through the instrument panel and center console
9.
registers (if equipped).
10. Manual override controls: Allows you to manually select where
airflow is directed. To return to full automatic control, press AUTO.
11. OFF: Outside air is shut out and the fan will not operate.
12. Temperature control: Controls the temperature in the cabin of the
vehicle. Press to increase/decrease the temperature.
13. AUTO: To engage automatic temperature control, press AUTO and
select the desired temperature using the temperature control. The
system will automatically determine fan speed, airflow location, A/C on
or off, and outside or recirculated air, to heat or cool the vehicle to reach
the desired temperature.
14. EXT: Press to display outside temperature. Press again to display
cabin temperature settings.
48
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Climate Controls
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) system with heated seats
(if equipped)
Temperature conversion: To switch between Fahrenheit and Celsius:
If your vehicle is equipped with a full message center, refer to Setup
menu in the Message center section of the Driver Controls chapter.
If your vehicle is equipped with a mini message center, see your
authorized dealer for temperature conversion.
MAX A/C setting: In order to achieve maximum cooling performance,
press
, A/C,
, and set the temperature to 60°F (16°C) and the
highest blower setting.
Defrost: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster
1.
and demister vents. Can be used to clear thin ice or fog from the
select another mode.
windshield. To exit
Fan speed control: Press to manually increase or decrease the
2.
fan speed. To return to automatic fan operation, press AUTO.
Rear defroster: Press to defrost the rear window. Refer to Rear
3. R
window defroster in this section for more information. If your vehicle is
equipped with both rear defroster and heated mirrors, the same button
will activate both.
Passenger heated seat control: Press to heat the passenger
4.
seat. Press once to activate high heat (two indicator lights). Press again
to activate low heat (one indicator light). Press again to deactivate the
passenger heated seat.
49
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Climate Controls
5.
: Distributes air through the windshield defroster ducts, demister
outlets, and the front and rear seat floor ducts. The system will
automatically provide outside air to reduce window fogging.
6.
: Distributes air through the floor and rear seat floor ducts.
: Distributes air through the instrument panel and center console
7.
registers (if equipped) and the front and rear seat floor ducts.
: Distributes air through the instrument panel and center console
8.
registers (if equipped).
Driver heated seat control: Press to heat the driver seat. Press
9.
once to activate high heat (two indicator lights). Press again to activate
low heat (one indicator light). Press again to deactivate the driver
heated seat.
10. Manual override controls: Allows you to manually select where
airflow is directed. To return to full automatic control, press AUTO.
Recirculation control: Press to activate/deactivate air
11.
recirculation in cabin. Recirculated air may reduce the amount of time to
cool down the interior of the vehicle and may also help reduce undesired
odors from reaching the interior of the vehicle. Recirculation can be
(defrost).
engaged manually in any other airflow selection except
Recirculation may turn off automatically in all airflow selections except
MAX A/C.
12. A/C control: Press to activate/deactivate air conditioning. Use with
recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency. Engages
(defrost) and
(floor/defrost).
automatically in AUTO,
13. OFF: Outside air is shut out and the fan will not operate.
14. Temperature control: Press to increase/decrease the temperature
in the vehicle cabin.
15. AUTO: To engage automatic temperature control, press AUTO and
select the desired temperature using the temperature control. The
system will automatically determine fan speed, airflow location, A/C on
or off, and outside or recirculated air, to heat or cool the vehicle to reach
the desired temperature.
16. EXT: Press to display outside temperature. Press again to display
cabin temperature settings.
50
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Climate Controls
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) system operating tips
• To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather, place
position.
the air flow selector in the
• To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle, do not drive with the
engaged and A/C off.
system OFF, or with recirculated air
• Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the
airflow to the back seats.
• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of
the windshield.
• To improve the A/C cool down, drive with the windows slightly open
for 2-3 minutes after start up or until the vehicle has been “aired out.”
During extreme high ambient temperatures when idling stationary for
extended periods of time in gear, it is recommended to run the A/C in
the MAX A/C mode, reduce blower fan speed from the highest setting
and put the vehicle’s transmission into the PARK gear position
(automatic transmission only) to continue to receive cool air from your
A/C system.
• For maximum cooling performance (MAX A/C):
Automatic operation:
• Press AUTO for full automatic operation.
• Do not override A/C or
(recirculated air).
• Set the temperature to 60°F (16°C).
Override operation:
• Select air distribution.
(recirculated air). Use
(recirculated air) with
• Select A/C and
A/C to provide colder airflow.
• Set the temperature to 60°F (16°C).
• Set highest fan speed initially, then adjust to maintain comfort.
In MAX A/C setting:
• Adjust the temperature control to full cold.
• Set highest fan speed initially, then adjust to maintain comfort.
51
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Climate Controls
In
(panel) or
(panel/floor) modes:
• Adjust the temperature control to full cold.
(recirculated air). Use recirculated air with A/C to
• Select A/C and
provide colder airflow.
• Set highest fan speed initially, then adjust to maintain comfort.
• To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather:
1. Select
.
2. Select A/C.
3. Adjust the temperature control to maintain comfort.
4. Set the fan speed to the highest setting.
5. Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows.
To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents, close the vents
located in the middle of the instrument panel.
REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER R
The rear defroster control is located on the climate control panel and
works to clear the rear window of fog and thin ice.
The ignition must be on to operate the rear window defroster.
The rear defroster turns off automatically after 10 minutes or when the
ignition is turned off. To manually turn off the defroster before
10 minutes have passed, push the control again.
Do not use razor blades or other sharp objects to clean the inside
of the rear window or to remove decals from the inside of the
rear window. This may cause damage to the heated grid lines and
will not be covered by your warranty.
52
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Lights
HEADLAMP CONTROL
Turns the lamps off.
Turns on the parking lamps,
instrument panel lamps, license
plate lamps and tail lamps.
Turns the low beam headlamps
on.
Autolamp control (if equipped)
The autolamp system provides light
sensitive automatic on-off control of
the exterior lights normally
controlled by the headlamp control.
• To turn autolamps on, rotate the
.
control counterclockwise to
• To turn autolamps off, rotate the
control clockwise to off.
The autolamp system also keeps the
lights on for a predetermined
amount of time after the ignition switch is turned to off. You can change
the amount of time the lamps stay on by using the programming
procedure that follows:
Note: If the vehicle is equipped with autolamps, it will have the
headlamps on with windshield wipers feature. If the windshield
wipers are turned on (for a fixed period of time), the exterior lamps will
turn on with the headlamp control in the Autolamp position.
Autolamps - Programmable exit delay
Programmable exit delay allows the length of the autolamp exit delay to
be changed.
To program the auto lamp exit time delay:
1. Start with the ignition in the off position and the headlamp control in
the autolamp position.
2. Turn the headlamp switch to off.
53
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Lights
3. Turn the ignition switch to on and then back to off.
4. Turn the headlamp switch to the autolamp position. The headlamps
will turn on.
5. Wait the desired amount of time for the exit delay you want (up to
three minutes), then turn the headlamp switch to off. The headlamps
will turn off.
Fog lamp control (if equipped)
With the ignition on, the fog lamps
can be turned on when the
headlamp control is pulled toward
you and is in any of the following
positions:
• Parking lamps
• Low beams
• Autolamps (when active)
The fog lamp indicator light will
illuminate when the fog lamps have been turned on. The fog lamps will
not operate when the high beams are active.
Daytime running lamps (DRL) (if equipped)
Turns the headlamps on with a reduced output.
To activate:
• the ignition must be in the on position,
• the headlamp control is in the off, autolamps or parking lamp position
and
• the transmission must be out of the P (Park) position.
WARNING: Always remember to turn on your headlamps at
dusk or during inclement weather. The Daytime Running Lamp
(DRL) system does not activate the tail lamps and generally may not
provide adequate lighting during these conditions. Failure to activate
your headlamps under these conditions may result in a collision.
54
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Lights
High beams
Push the lever toward the
instrument panel to activate. Pull
the lever towards you to deactivate.
OFF
Flash to pass
Pull toward you slightly to activate
and release to deactivate.
PANEL DIMMER CONTROL
Use to adjust the brightness of the
instrument panel and all applicable
switches in the vehicle during
headlamp and parking lamp
operation.
Move the control to the full upright
position, past detent, to turn on the
interior lamps. Move the control to
the full downward position, past
detent, to turn off the interior lights.
The instrument panel/switch lighting
remains lit.
55
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Lights
Note: If the battery is disconnected, discharged, or a new battery is
installed, the dimmer switch requires re-calibration. Rotate the dimmer
switch from the full dim position to the full dome/on position to reset.
This will ensure that your displays are visible under all lighting
conditions.
AIMING THE HEADLAMPS
The headlamps on your vehicle are properly aimed at the assembly plant.
If your vehicle has been in an accident, the alignment of your headlamps
should be checked by your authorized dealer.
Vertical aim adjustment
1. Park the vehicle directly in front of a wall or screen on a level surface,
approximately 25 feet (7.6 meters) away.
• (1) 8 feet (2.4 meters)
• (2) Center height of lamp to
ground
• (3) 25 feet (7.6 meters)
• (4) Horizontal reference line
2. Measure the height of the
headlamp bulb center from the
ground and mark an 8 foot
(2.4 meter) horizontal reference line
on the vertical wall or screen at this
height (a piece of masking tape works well).
3. Turn on the low beam headlamps to illuminate the wall or screen and
open the hood.
To see a clearer light pattern for adjusting, you may want to block the
light from one headlamp while adjusting the other.
4. On the wall or screen you will
observe an area of high intensity
light. The top of the high intensity
area should touch the horizontal
reference line, if not, the beam will
need to be adjusted using the next
step.
56
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Lights
5. Locate the vertical adjuster on
each headlamp. Using a Phillips #2
screwdriver, turn the adjuster either
clockwise (to adjust down) or
counterclockwise (to adjust up).
The horizontal edge of the brighter
light should touch the horizontal
reference line.
6. Close the hood and turn off the
lamps.
HORIZONTAL AIM IS NOT REQUIRED FOR THIS VEHICLE AND IS
NON-ADJUSTABLE.
TURN SIGNAL CONTROL
• Push down to activate the left
turn signal.
• Push up to activate the right turn
signal.
INTERIOR LAMPS
Dome lamps and map lamps
The map lamps are located on the
overhead console. Press the controls
to turn on the lamps.
57
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Lights
Your vehicle may also have reading
lamps within the rear dome lamp(s).
Press the switches on either side of
the dome lamp to turn on the
lamps.
Ambient/Mood lighting (if equipped)
Illuminates four footwells, two
console cupholders and the console
bin with a choice of seven colors.
The ambient lighting control switch
is located on the center console
near the gearshift lever. To activate,
press and release the control switch
to cycle through the seven color
choices plus the off state.
The lights come on whenever the ignition is in either the on or accessory
position. Note: The ambient lights will stay on until after the ignition is
placed in the off position and either of the front doors are opened or the
delay accessory timer expires.
BULB REPLACEMENT
Headlamp condensation
Exterior lamps are vented to accommodate normal changes in pressure.
Condensation can be a natural by-product of this design. When moist air
enters the lamp assembly through the vents, condensation can occur
when the temperature is cold. When normal condensation occurs, a thin
film of mist can form on the interior of the lens. The thin mist eventually
clears and exits through the vents during normal operation. Clearing
time may take as long as 48 hours under dry weather conditions.
Examples of acceptable condensation are:
• Presence of thin mist (no streaks, drip marks or droplets)
• Fine mist covers less than 50% of the lens
Examples of unacceptable moisture (usually caused by a lamp water
leak) are:
• Water puddle inside the lamp
• Large water droplets, drip marks or streaks present on the interior of
the lens
58
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Lights
Take your vehicle to dealer for service if any of the above conditions of
unacceptable moisture are present.
Using the right bulbs
Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below. Headlamp bulbs must
be marked with an authorized “D.O.T.” for North America and an “E” for
Europe to ensure lamp performance, light brightness and pattern and safe
visibility. The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly or void the
lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb burn time.
Function
Number of bulbs
Trade
number
H7
H11LL
168
3457NAK
(amber)
194
3157 K
921
C5W
921
H11
12V6W
578
Headlamp high beam
2
Headlamp low beam
2
Front sidemarker lamp
2
Front park/turn signal
2
lamp
Rear sidemarker lamp
2
Stop/tail/turn lamp
2
Backup lamp
2
License plate lamp
2
High-mount brake lamp
1
Fog lamp (if equipped)
2
Map lamp
2
Dome/reading lamp
6
Visor vanity lamp - Slide
on Rail system (SOR) (if
2
37 or 14V1CP
equipped)
Puddle lamp (if equipped)
2
W5W
Glove box lamp
1
194
Luggage compartment
1
578
lamp
All replacement bulbs are clear in color except where noted.
To replace all instrument panel lights - see your authorized dealer.
59
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Lights
Replacing exterior bulbs
Check the operation of all the bulbs frequently.
Replacing headlamp bulbs
Highbeam bulb (lower) replacement
1. Make sure headlamp switch is in the off position, then open the hood.
2. Reach over the front bolster.
3. Disengage top of flexible washer
bottle filler neck from snap strap
attachment and position it to gain
access path to the high beam bulb
(Passenger side only).
Note: If the bulb is not accessible after completing Step 3, see your
authorized dealer for bulb replacement.
4. Remove the protective cap/grill
from the headlamp housing by
grabbing it and pulling rearward.
5. Remove the bulb socket by
rotating it counterclockwise, then
pulling it straight out of the lamp
assembly.
6. Carefully pull bulb straight out of
socket and push in the new one.
60
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Lights
WARNING: Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep
out of children’s reach. Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base
and do not touch the glass. The oil from your hand could cause the
bulb to break the next time the headlamps are operated.
7. For ease of bulb socket installation into the lamp assembly, hold the
bulb socket at 15 degrees clockwise from a vertical position. Use the two
lead wires oriented up to represent the vertical reference position.
8. From the 15 degree position, rotate the bulb socket clockwise to a
locked position.
9. Tuck the two lead wires into the lamp housing to assure that they are
not pinched when installing the protective rubber cap.
10. Install the protective cap/grill to the housing circular ring by pushing
and pressing it forward.
11. Re-apply pressure around the complete circular ring on the housing
to make sure the protective cap is completely seated.
12. Reconnect the washer bottle neck by reversing Step 3 (Passenger
side only).
13. Turn the headlamps on and make sure they work properly. If the
headlamp was correctly aligned before you changed the bulb, you should
not need to align it again.
Lowbeam bulb (upper) replacement
1. Make sure headlamp switch is in the off position, then open the hood.
2. Remove the vertical shield from
the bolster by disengaging the
S-shaped clip and rotating it up in a
clockwise direction (Driver side
only).
61
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Lights
3. Remove the air tube from the air
filter assembly (Driver side only).
4. Remove screw from oval splash
shield access panel from the
exterior wheel well area. Lift up and
rearward to release a hidden finger
attachment at the lower portion of
the panel (Passenger side only).
5. From the exterior wheel well
area, reach arm through splash
shield opening to access bulb socket
(Passenger side only).
6. Remove the protective cap/grill
from the housing by grabbing it and
pulling rearward.
7. Remove the bulb socket by
rotating it counterclockwise, then
pulling it straight out of the lamp
assembly.
8. Let go of the bulb socket and
leave it dangling near the lamp
housing (Passenger side only).
9. Reach over the front bolster in the engine area, and with a tool if
necessary, bring the bulb socket upwards into an unobstructed area to
replace the bulb (Passenger side only).
62
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Lights
10. Disconnect the electrical
connector from the bulb socket and
discard the old bulb socket.
11. Connect the new bulb socket to
the electrical connector.
WARNING: Handle a
halogen headlamp bulb
carefully and keep out of
children’s reach. Grasp the bulb
only by its plastic base and do not
touch the glass. The oil from your
hand could cause the bulb to
break the next time the
headlamps are operated.
12. After the new bulb is installed, carefully let the bulb socket dangle
downward near the lamp housing (Passenger side only).
13. From the exterior wheel well area, reach arm through splash shield
opening to install bulb socket with new bulb (Passenger side only).
14. Install the new bulb socket into the lamp assembly by aligning the
indexing fingers, then rotate clockwise to locked position.
15. Install the protective cap/grill to the housing circular ring by pushing
and pressing it forward.
16. Re-apply pressure around the complete circular ring on the housing
to make sure the protective cap is completely seated.
17. Reinstall splash shield access panel with screw (Passenger side only).
18. Reinstall the air tube to the air filter assembly (Driver side only).
19. Reinstall the vertical shield to the bolster (Driver side only).
20. Turn the headlamps on and make sure they work properly. If the
headlamp was correctly aligned before you changed the bulb, you should
not need to align it again.
63
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Lights
Replacing front parking lamp/turn signal bulbs
1. Make sure headlamp switch is in the off position, then open the hood.
2. Reach over the front bolster.
3. Remove screw from oval splash
shield access panel from the
exterior wheel well area. Lift up and
rearward to release a hidden finger
attachment at the lower portion of
the panel (Passenger side only).
4. From the exterior wheel well
area, reach arm through splash
shield opening to access bulb socket
(Passenger side only).
5. Remove the bulb socket by
rotating it counterclockwise, then
pulling it out of the lamp assembly.
6. Let go of the bulb socket and let
the bulb socket dangle downward
near the lamp housing (Passenger
side only).
7. Reach over the front bolster in
the engine area, with a tool if
necessary, bring the bulb socket
upwards into an unobstructed area to replace the bulb (Passenger side
only).
8. Carefully pull bulb straight out of
socket and push in the new one.
9. After the new bulb is installed,
carefully let the bulb socket dangle
downward near the lamp housing
(Passenger side only).
10. From the exterior wheel well
area reach arm through splash
shield opening to install bulb socket with new bulb (Passenger side
only).
11. Install new bulb socket into the lamp assembly by aligning the
indexing fingers, then rotate clockwise to locked position.
12. Reinstall splash shield access panel with screw (Passenger side only).
64
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Lights
Replacing front side marker bulbs
1. Make sure the headlamp control
is in the off position.
2. Pry the lamp away from the
vehicle at the rear of lamp at the
wheel opening. Rotate lamp from
the wheel opening away from the
vehicle. As the lamp separates from
the vehicle, slide the lamp towards
the wheel opening to disengage
lamp.
3. Rotate the lamp clockwise while
holding the electrical connector in
place with your other hand. After
rotating the lamp 90 degrees
clockwise, pull and disengage the
wire harness and bulb from the
lamp.
4. With the bulb exposed, carefully remove the bulb from the socket by
grasping the bulb and pulling it away from the wire harness.
Replace with a new bulb, and reverse the removal steps to complete the
process.
Replacing tail/brake/turn signal/backup lamp bulbs
The tail/brake/turn signal and backup lamp bulbs are located in the tail
lamp assembly. Follow the same steps to replace either bulb.
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is in the off position and open the
trunk.
2. Lift out trunk floor carpeting panel to access a luggage scuff plate
(hard molding) shingles and a trunk side panel (dark grey, soft
wheelhouse side trim panel) at the lamp area.
3. Carefully pull/push the trunk side panel (dark grey, soft wheelhouse
side trim panel) outboard to expose the lamp assembly. The most
effective point to grasp the trunk side panel when pulling it out from the
luggage scuff plate is at it’s bottom edge where that edge meets the
exposed sheet metal of the trunk floor.
Note: Do not allow the trunk side panel to remain bent and untucked
from the luggage scuff plate (hard molding) for a long period of time.
Doing so may result in permanent deformation.
65
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Lights
4. Remove the bulb socket by
turning it counterclockwise and
pulling it straight out.
5. Pull the bulb from the socket and
push in the new bulb.
6. Install the bulb socket into the
lamp assembly by rotating it
clockwise.
7. Carefully push the trunk side
panel (dark grey, soft wheelhouse
side trim panel) back to the shingle position to the luggage scuff plate
(hard molding).
8. Install trunk floor carpeting panel.
Replacing high-mount brake lamp bulb
1. Make sure the ignition control is
in the off position.
2. Open the trunk and reach
underneath package tray to locate
lamp assembly.
3. Remove the bulb socket by
rotating it counterclockwise, then
pulling it out of the lamp assembly.
4. Pull the bulb straight from the
socket and push in the new bulb.
5. Install the bulb socket into the lamp assembly by rotating it clockwise.
Replacing license plate lamp bulbs
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is
in the off position.
2. Remove the two screws from the
license plate lamp assembly.
3. Remove bulb socket by turning
counterclockwise.
4. Carefully pull the bulb out from
the socket.
Install new bulb(s) in reverse order.
66
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Lights
Replacing fog lamp bulbs (if equipped)
1. Make sure the fog lamp switch is
in the off position.
2. From underneath the vehicle,
partially remove the tire splash
shield by removing four drive
screws.
After removing to allow free access
to the front fog lamp bulb and
electrical wire harness, the splash shield flap should be able to be
repositioned.
3. Rotate the harness/bulb assembly
counterclockwise, to remove from
the fog lamp.
4. Carefully disconnect the bulb
from the harness assembly via the
two snap clips.
Install the new bulb in reverse order.
67
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
MULTI-FUNCTION LEVER
Windshield wiper: Rotate the end
of the control away from you to
increase the speed of the wipers;
rotate towards you to decrease the
speed of the wipers.
Speed dependent wipers: When the wiper control is set on the
intermittent settings, the speed of the wipers will automatically adjust
with the vehicle speed. The faster your vehicle is travelling the faster the
wipers will go.
Windshield washer: Push the end
of the stalk:
• briefly: causes a single swipe of
the wipers without washer fluid.
• a quick push and hold: the wipers
will swipe three times with
washer fluid.
• a long push and hold: the wipers
and washer fluid will be activated
for up to ten seconds.
Courtesy wipe feature: One extra wipe will occur a few seconds after
washing the front window to clear any excess washer fluid remaining on
the windshield.
Note: Do not operate the washer when the washer reservoir is empty.
This may cause the washer pump to overheat. Check the washer fluid
level frequently. Do not operate the wipers when the windshield is dry.
This may scratch the glass, damage the wiper blades and cause the wiper
motor to burn out. Before operating the wiper on a dry windshield,
always use the windshield washer. In freezing weather, be sure the wiper
blades are not frozen to the windshield before operating the wipers.
Windshield wiper rainlamp feature (if equipped with Autolamp)
When the windshield wipers are turned on during daylight, and the
headlamp control is in the autolamp position, the exterior lamps will turn
on after a brief delay and will remain on until the wipers are turned off.
68
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
TILT/TELESCOPE STEERING WHEEL
To adjust the steering wheel:
1. Pull the lever down to unlock the
steering column.
2. While the lever is in the down
position, move the steering wheel
up or down and in or out until you
find the desired position.
3. While holding the steering wheel
in place, pull the lever up to its
original position to lock the steering
column.
WARNING: Never adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is
moving.
ILLUMINATED VISOR MIRROR (IF EQUIPPED)
Lift the mirror cover to turn on the
visor mirror lamps.
Slide on rod feature
(if equipped)
Rotate the visor towards the side
window and extend it rearward for
additional sunlight coverage.
Note: To stow the visor back into
the headliner, visor must be
retracted before moving it back
towards the windshield.
69
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
OVERHEAD CONSOLE (IF EQUIPPED)
The appearance of your vehicle’s overhead console will vary according to
your option package.
Storage compartment
Press on the rear edge of the
compartment door to open.
The storage compartment may be
used to secure sunglasses or a
similar object.
CENTER CONSOLE
Your vehicle may be equipped with a
variety of console features. These
include:
1. Cup holders
2. Secondary storage bin (on hinges
inside utility compartment)
3. Utility compartment with power
point, AIJ (Audio Input Jack), USB
port (if equipped), and coin holder
inside
WARNING: Use only soft cups in the cup holder. Hard objects
can injure you in a collision.
70
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
CLOCK (IF EQUIPPED)
Press the right (+) control to move
the time display forwards.
Press the left (-) control to move
the time display backwards.
INSTRUMENT PANEL STORAGE COMPARTMENT
The storage compartment may be
used to secure sunglasses or similar
sized objects. Press the control to
open the storage compartment.
AUXILIARY POWER POINT (12VDC)
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not insert
any other object in the power outlet as this will damage the
outlet and blow the fuse. Do not hang any type of accessory or
accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the power
outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty.
The auxiliary power points are
located on the instrument panel and
in the center console utility
compartment.
Do not use the power point for
operating the cigarette lighter
element (if equipped).
71
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
To prevent the fuse from being blown, do not use the power point(s)
over the vehicle capacity of 12 VDC/180W. If the power point or cigar
lighter socket is not working, a fuse may have blown. Refer to Fuses and
relays in the Roadside Emergencies chapter for information on
checking and replacing fuses.
To have full capacity usage of your power point, the engine is required to
be running to avoid unintentional discharge of the battery. To prevent
the battery from being discharged:
• do not use the power point longer than necessary when the engine is
not running,
• do not leave battery chargers, video game adapters, computers and
other devices plugged in overnight or when the vehicle is parked for
extended periods.
Always keep the power point caps closed when not being used.
Cigar/Cigarette lighter (if equipped)
Do not plug optional electrical accessories into the cigarette lighter
socket.
Do not hold the lighter in with your hand while it is heating, this will
damage the lighter element and socket. The lighter will be released from
its heating position when it is ready to be used.
Improper use of the lighter can cause damage not covered by your
warranty.
POWER WINDOWS
WARNING: Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and
do not let children play with the power windows. They may
seriously injure themselves.
WARNING: When closing the power windows, you should verify
they are free of obstructions and ensure that children and/or
pets are not in the proximity of the window openings.
72
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Press and pull the window switches
to open and close windows.
• Push down (to the first detent)
and hold the switch to open.
• Pull up (to the first detent) and
hold the switch to close.
AUTO
Rear Window Buffeting: When one or both of the rear windows are
open, the vehicle may demonstrate a wind throb or buffeting noise. This
noise can be alleviated by lowering a front window approximately
2–3 inches (5–8 cm).
One touch down
Allows the driver’s window to open
fully without holding the control
down. Push the switch completely
down to the second detent and
release quickly. The window will
open fully. Momentarily press the
switch to any position to stop the
window operation.
Window lock
The window lock feature allows only
the driver to operate the power
windows.
To lock out all the window controls
(except for the driver’s) press the
right side of the control. Press the
left side to restore the window
controls.
Accessory delay
With accessory delay, the window switches, audio system, and moon roof
(if equipped) may be used for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch
is turned off or until either front door is opened.
73
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
INTERIOR MIRROR
The interior rear view mirror has two pivot points on the support arm
which lets you adjust the mirror UP or DOWN and from SIDE to SIDE.
WARNING: Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is in
motion.
Automatic dimming interior rear view mirror (if equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with an interior rear view mirror that has
an auto-dimming function. The electronic day/night mirror will change
from the normal (high reflective) state to the non-glare (darkened) state
when bright lights (glare) reach the mirror. When the mirror detects
bright light from behind the vehicle, it will automatically adjust (darken)
to minimize glare.
Without microphone
With microphone
The mirror will automatically return to the normal state whenever the
vehicle is placed in R (Reverse) to ensure a bright clear view when
backing up.
Do not block the sensors on the front and back of the interior
rear view mirror since this may impair proper mirror
performance.
Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh
abrasives, fuel or other petroleum-based cleaning products.
74
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
EXTERIOR MIRRORS
Power side view mirrors
WARNING: Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is in
motion.
To adjust your mirrors:
1. Rotate the control clockwise to
adjust the right mirror and rotate
the control counterclockwise to
adjust the left mirror.
2. Move the control in the direction
you wish to tilt the mirror.
3. Return to the center position to lock mirrors in place.
Heated mirrors (if equipped)
Both mirrors are heated
automatically to remove ice, mist
and fog when the rear window
defrost is activated.
Do not remove ice from the
mirrors with a scraper or
attempt to readjust the mirror
glass if it is frozen in place.
These actions could cause damage to the glass and mirrors.
SPEED CONTROL
With speed control set, you can maintain a set speed without keeping
your foot on the accelerator pedal.
WARNING: Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on
roads that are winding, slippery or unpaved.
75
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Setting speed control
Note: The appearance of your vehicle’s speed control switches
may vary according to your option package.
The controls for using your speed
control are located on the steering
wheel for your convenience.
1. Press the ON control and release
it.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed.
3. Press the SET + control and
release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
light on the
5. The indicator
instrument cluster will turn on.
Note:
• Vehicle speed may vary momentarily when driving up and down a
steep hill.
• If the vehicle speed increases above the set speed on a downhill, you
may want to apply the brakes to reduce the speed.
• If the vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph (16 km/h) below
your set speed on an uphill, your speed control will disengage.
Disengaging speed control
To disengage the speed control:
• Tap the brake pedal or clutch pedal (if equipped)
Disengaging the speed control will not erase previous set speed.
76
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Resuming a set speed
Press the RESUME control and
release it. This will automatically
return the vehicle to the previously
set speed.
Increasing speed while using speed control
There are two ways to set a higher
speed:
• Press and hold the SET + control
until you get to the desired
speed, then release the control.
You can also use the SET +
control to operate the Tap-Up
function. Press and release this
control to increase the vehicle set
speed in small amounts by 1 mph
(1.6 km/h).
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the desired speed. When the
vehicle reaches that speed press and release the SET + control.
Reducing speed while using speed control
There are two ways to reduce a set
speed:
• Press and hold the SET - control
until you get to the desired
speed, then release the control.
You can also use the SET control to operate the Tap-Down
function. Press and release this
control to decrease the vehicle
set speed in small amounts by
1 mph (1.6 km/h).
• Depress the brake pedal until the desired vehicle speed is reached and
press the SET + control.
77
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Turning off speed control
There are two ways to turn off the speed control:
• Press the OFF control.
• Turn off the ignition.
Note: When you turn off the speed
control or the ignition, your speed
control set speed memory is erased.
STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS (IF EQUIPPED)
Radio control features
Press MEDIA to select:
• AM, FM1, FM2, or CD
• SAT1, SAT2 or SAT3 (Satellite
Radio mode if equipped).
• LINE IN (Auxiliary input jack) (if
equipped)
In Radio mode:
to access the
• Press
next/previous preset station.
In CD mode:
to listen to the
• Press
next track on the disc.
In Satellite radio mode (if
equipped):
• Press
78
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
to advance through preset channels.
Driver Controls
In any mode:
• Press VOL + or VOL - to adjust
the volume.
Navigation system hands free
control features (if equipped)
control briefly
Press and hold
icon appears on
until the voice
the navigation display to use the
voice command feature.
to complete a voice
Press
command.
For further information on the
navigation system, refer to the Navigation System supplement.
SYNC system hands free control
feature (if equipped)
briefly to use the voice
Press
command feature. You will hear a
tone and LISTENING will appear in
the radio display. Press and
to exit voice command.
hold
to activate phone mode or
Press
answer a phone call. Press and
to end a call or exit phone
hold
mode.
to scroll through various menus and selections. Press
Press
OK to confirm your selection.
For further information on the SYNC system, refer to the SYNC
supplement.
79
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Navigation system/SYNC hands
free control features (if
equipped)
control briefly until the
Press
icon appears on the
voice
Navigation display to use the voice
command feature.
to activate phone mode or
Press
answer a phone call. Press and
hold
to exit phone mode or end
a call.
For further information on the Navigation system/SYNC system, refer to
the Navigation System and SYNC supplements.
MOON ROOF (IF EQUIPPED)
You can move the glass panel of the moon roof back to open or tilt up
(from the closed position) to ventilate the vehicle.
WARNING: Do not let children play with the moon roof or leave
children unattended in the vehicle. They may seriously hurt
themselves.
To open the moon roof:
The moon roof is equipped with an
automatic, one-touch, express
opening, closing and venting feature.
Press and release the rear portion of
the control. To stop motion at any
time during the one-touch
operation, press the control a
second time.
WARNING: When closing the moon roof, you should verify that
it is free of obstructions and ensure that children and/or pets are
not in the proximity of the moon roof opening.
To close the moon roof:
The moon roof is equipped with an automatic, one-touch, express closing
feature. Press and release the front portion of the control. To stop
motion at any time during the one-touch closing, press the control again.
80
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Bounce-back:
When an obstacle has been detected in the moon roof opening as the
moon roof is closing, the moon roof will automatically open and stop at a
prescribed position. This is known as “bounce-back”. If the ignition is
turned off (without accessory delay being active) during bounce-back,
the moon roof will move until the bounce-back position is reached.
Bounce-back override:
To override bounce-back, press and hold the front portion of the control.
For example: Bounce-back can be used to overcome the resistance of ice
on the moon roof or seals. If during a bounce-back condition, the control is
released to the neutral position, then held in the one-touch position within
two seconds after the moon roof reaches the bounce-back position, the
moon roof will travel with no bounce-back protection. If the control
is released before the moon roof reaches fully closed or the ignition is
turned off (without accessory delay being active), the moon roof will stop.
Security override can be used if the moon roof movement is restricted in
some way, for example, if there is ice on the moon roof or seals.
To vent:
• To tilt the moon roof into the vent position (when the glass panel is
closed), press and release the front portion of the control.
• To close the moon roof from the vent position, press and hold the rear
portion of the control until the glass panel stops moving.
The moon roof has a sliding shade that can be opened or closed when
the glass panel is shut. To close the shade, pull it toward the front of the
vehicle
Accessory delay:
With accessory delay, the window switches, audio system, and moon roof
(if equipped) may be used for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch
is turned off or until any door is opened
MESSAGE CENTER (IF EQUIPPED)
With the ignition in the on position,
the message center, located on your
instrument cluster, displays
important vehicle information
through a constant monitor of
vehicle systems. You may select
display features on the message center for a display of status preceded
by a brief indicator chime. The system will also notify you of potential
vehicle problems with a display of system warnings followed by a long
indicator chime.
81
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Selectable features
Reset
Press this control to select and reset
functions shown in the INFO menu
and SETUP menu.
Info menu
This control displays the following
control displays:
• Odometer
• Trip Odometer A or B
• Distance to Empty
• Average Fuel Economy
• Average Speed
• Trip Elapsed Drive Time 1 or 2
• Compass (if equipped)
• Compass zone/calibration adjustment
Odometer/Trip odometer
Refer to Gauges in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
Distance to empty (DTE)
Selecting this function from the
INFO menu estimates approximately
how far you can drive with the fuel
remaining in your tank under
normal driving conditions.
Remember to turn the ignition off
when refueling to allow this feature to correctly detect the added fuel.
The DTE function will display LOW FUEL LEVEL when you have
approximately 50 miles (80 km) to empty. If you RESET this warning
message, this display will return within 10 minutes.
DTE is calculated using a running average fuel economy, which is based
on your recent driving history of 500 miles (800 km). This value is not
the same as the average fuel economy display. The running average fuel
economy is reinitialized to a factory default value if the battery is
disconnected.
82
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Average fuel economy (AFE)
Select this function from the INFO
menu to display your average fuel
economy in miles/gallon or
liters/100 km.
If you calculate your average fuel
economy by dividing 100 miles
traveled by gallons of fuel used (kilometers traveled by liters used), your
figure may be different than displayed for the following reasons:
• Your vehicle was not perfectly level during fill-up
• Differences in the automatic shut-off points on the fuel pumps at
service stations
• Variations in top-off procedure from one fill-up to another
• Rounding of the displayed values to the nearest 0.1 gallon (liter)
1. Drive the vehicle at least 5 miles (8 km) with the speed control
system engaged to display a stabilized average.
2. Record the highway fuel economy for future reference.
It is important to press the RESET control (press and hold RESET for
two seconds in order to reset the function) after setting the speed
control to get accurate highway fuel economy readings.
For more information refer to Essentials of good fuel economy in the
Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
Average Speed
Select this function from the INFO menu to display AVERAGE SPEED
and press the RESET control (press and hold RESET for two seconds in
order to reset the function). Your average speed from that point will be
displayed until RESET is pressed and held for two seconds again.
Trip elapsed drive time
Select this function from the INFO
menu to display a timer.
To operate the Trip Elapsed Drive
Time perform the following:
1. Press and release RESET in order
to start the timer.
2. Press and release RESET to pause the timer.
3. Press and hold RESET for two seconds in order to reset the timer.
83
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Compass display (if equipped)
Select this function from the INFO menu. Press the INFO button
repeatedly until the Compass and Odometer are displayed. (Do not
select Trip, DTE, or AFE. The top of the message center must be blank).
The compass reading may be affected when you drive near large
buildings, bridges, power lines and powerful broadcast antenna. Magnetic
or metallic objects placed in, on or near the vehicle may also affect
compass accuracy.
Usually, when something affects the compass readings, the compass will
correct itself after a few days of operating your vehicle in normal
conditions. If the compass still appears to be inaccurate, a manual
calibration may be necessary. Refer to Compass zone/calibration
adjustment.
Most geographic areas (zones) have a magnetic north compass point that
varies slightly from the northerly direction on maps. This variation is four
degrees between adjacent zones and will become noticeable as the
vehicle crosses multiple zones. A correct zone setting will eliminate this
error. Refer to Compass zone/calibration adjustment.
Compass zone/calibration adjustment
Perform this adjustment in an open area free from steel structures and
high voltage lines.
For optimum calibration, turn off all electrical accessories (heater/air
conditioning, wipers, etc.) and make sure all vehicle doors are shut.
1. Turn ignition to the on position.
2. Start the engine.
3. Press the INFO button repeatedly until the Compass and Odometer
are displayed. (Do not select Trip, DTE, or AFE. The top of the message
center must be blank).
Note: If the compass displays ⬙CAL 000000.0 mi⬙ instead of heading
information, the compass will need to be calibrated. Slowly drive the
vehicle in a circle (less than 3 mph [5 km/h]) until the ⬙CAL⬙ indicator
changes to display compass heading. This may take up to three circles to
complete calibration.
84
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
4. Determine your magnetic zone by
referring to the zone map.
3 2
1
15
4
14
13
5
12
6
7 8 9 1011
5. Press and hold the RESET until
the message center display changes
to show the current zone setting.
6. Release the RESET control, then
slowly press RESET down again.
7. Press the SETUP control
repeatedly until the correct zone
setting for your geographic location
is displayed on the message center. To exit the zone setting mode press
and release the RESET control.
8. Press the RESET control to start
the compass calibration function.
9. Slowly drive the vehicle in a
circle (less than 3 mph [5 km/h])
until the CIRCLE SLOWLY TO
CALIBRATE indicator changes to
CALIBRATION COMPLETED. This
will take up to three circles to complete calibration.
10. The compass is now calibrated.
85
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Setup menu
Press this control for the following
displays:
• System Check
• Units (English/Metric)
• Language
• Easy entry/exit seat (if equipped)
• Reverse sensing system (Park Aid) (if equipped)
System check
Selecting this function from the
SETUP menu causes the message
center to cycle through each of the
systems being monitored.
Pressing the RESET control cycles
the message center through each of the systems being monitored.
Some monitored systems show message only if a warning is present.
The sequence of the system check report is as follows:
1. DOORS CLOSED
2. ENGINE TEMPERATURE
3. OIL PRESSURE
4. BRAKE FLUID LEVEL
5. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (if equipped and warning is
present)
6. EXTERIOR LAMPS (if equipped)
7. REMOVE OBJECT NEAR PASSENGER SEAT (if warning is present)
8. PARKING AID (if equipped and warning is present)
9. FUEL LEVEL
10. DISTANCE TO EMPTY
86
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Units (English/Metric)
1. Select this function from the
SETUP menu for the current units
to be displayed.
2. Press the RESET control to
change from English to Metric.
Language
1. Select this function from the
SETUP menu for the current
language to be displayed.
2. Pressing the RESET control
cycles the message center through
each of the language choices.
3. Press and hold the RESET
control to set the language choice.
Easy entry/exit (if equipped)
This feature automatically moves the drivers seat backwards for easy exit
from the vehicle.
1. To disable/enable the easy
entry/exit seat feature, select this
function from the SETUP control for
the current display mode.
2. Press the RESET control to turn
the easy entry/exit seat ON or OFF.
Reverse Sensing System (Park aid) (if equipped)
This feature sounds a warning tone to warn the driver of obstacles near
the rear bumper, and functions only when R (Reverse) gear is selected.
87
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
1. Select this function from the
SETUP menu to disable the reverse
sensing system feature.
2. Press the RESET control to turn
the rear park assist OFF. When R
(Reverse) gear is selected, PARK AID off will be displayed.
System warnings
System warnings alert you to possible problems or malfunctions in your
vehicle’s operating systems.
In the event of a multiple warning situation, the message center will
cycle the display to show all warnings by displaying each one for several
seconds.
The message center will display the last selected feature if there are no
more warning messages. This allows you to use the full functionality of
the message center after you acknowledge the warning by pressing the
RESET control and clearing the warning message.
Warning messages that have been reset are divided into three categories:
• They will not disappear until a condition is changed.
• They will reappear on the display 10 minutes from the reset.
• They will not reappear until an ignition off/on cycle has been
completed.
This acts as a reminder that these warning conditions still exist within
the vehicle.
Warnings
Driver’s door ajar
Passenger door ajar
Left rear door ajar
Right rear door ajar
Park brake engaged
Low fuel level
Check brake system
88
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Status
Warning cannot be reset (CLOSE
DOOR TO RESET) will be displayed
RELEASE PARK BRAKE will be
displayed
Warning returns after 10 minutes
Driver Controls
Warnings
Check park aid (if equipped)
Brake fluid level low
Low tire pressure
Tire pressure monitor fault
Tire pressure sensor fault
Trunk ajar
Remove objects near pass seat
Compass error
Intkey could not program
Status
Warning returns after the ignition key
is turned from off to on
Maximum number of Integrated Keys
exceeded
DRIVER DOOR AJAR — Displayed when the driver’s door is not
completely closed.
PASSENGER DOOR AJAR — Displayed when the passenger side door
is not completely closed.
REAR LEFT DOOR AJAR — Displayed when the rear left door is not
completely closed.
REAR RIGHT DOOR AJAR — Displayed when the rear right door is
not completely closed.
PARK BRAKE ENGAGED — Displayed when the park brake is
engaged. If the warning stays on after the park brake is off, contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
CHECK BRAKE SYSTEM — Displayed when the brake system needs
servicing. If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
FUEL LEVEL LOW — Displayed as an early reminder of a low fuel
condition.
BRAKE FLUID LEVEL LOW — Indicates the brake fluid level is low
and the brake system should be inspected immediately. Refer to Brake
fluid in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
CHECK PARK AID(if equipped) — Displayed when the transmission
is in R (Reverse) and the Reverse Sensing System (Park Aid) is disabled.
Refer to Reverse Sensing System (Park Aid) in this section to enable.
LOW TIRE PRESSURE — Displayed when one or more tires on your
vehicle have low tire pressure. Refer to Inflating your tires in the Tires,
Wheels and Loading chapter.
89
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR FAULT — Displayed when the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System is malfunctioning. If the warning stays on or
continues to come on, have the system inspected by your authorized
dealer.
TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR FAULT — Displayed when a tire pressure
sensor is malfunctioning, or your spare tire is in use. For more
information on how the system operates under these conditions, refer to
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) in the Tires, Wheels and
Loading chapter. If the warning stays on or continues to come on, have
the system inspected by your authorized dealer.
TRUNK AJAR — Displayed when the trunk is not completely closed.
REMOVE OBJECTS NEAR PASS SEAT — Displayed when objects
are by the passenger seat. After the objects are moved away from the
seat, if the warning stays on or continues to come on contact your
authorized dealer.
INTKEY COULD NOT PROGRAM — Displayed when an attempt is
made to program a fifth Integrated Key to the Remote Key Entry
System. For more information on Integrated Key, refer to Locks and
Security chapter in this manual.
COMPASS ERROR (if equipped) — Displayed when the compass is
not operating properly. If the warning stays on or continues to come on,
contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
INTERIOR TRUNK CONTROL
Press the remote trunk release
control on the instrument panel to
the left of the steering wheel.
90
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
KEYS
Your vehicle is equipped with two
Integrated Keyhead Transmitters
(IKTs). The IKT functions as both a
programmed ignition key that
operates all the locks and starts the
vehicle, and a remote keyless entry
transmitter.
Your IKTs are programmed to your vehicle; using a non-programmed key
will not permit your vehicle to start. If you lose your authorized dealer
supplied IKTs, replacement IKTs are available through your authorized
dealer. Standard SecuriLock™ keys without remote entry transmitter
functionality can also be purchased from your authorized dealer if
desired.
Always carry a spare key with you in case of an emergency.
For more information regarding programming replacement IKTs, refer to
the SecuriLock™ passive anti-theft system section later in this chapter.
Note: Your vehicle’s IKTs were
issued with a security label on them
that provides important vehicle key
cut information. It is recommended
that you maintain the label in a safe
place for future reference, such as
the inside front cover of this
Owner’s Guide.
91
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
Recommended handling of the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter
(IKT)
To avoid inadvertently activating the remote entry functions of your
vehicle, it is recommended that the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter
(IKT) be handled properly when starting and turning off your vehicle.
When inserting the IKT into the
ignition cylinder, place your thumb
on the center thumb rest of the IKT
and forefinger on the logo badge on
the opposite side.
To gain more leverage when rotating
the IKT in the ignition lock cylinder,
you can readjust the location of
your thumb to grasp the IKT on the
control.
outer edge next to the
Likewise, when rotating the IKT to
the off position in the ignition lock
cylinder, the bottom edge of the IKT
control can be
adjacent to the
utilized.
92
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
POWER DOOR LOCKS
• Press the
doors.
• Press the
doors.
control to unlock all
control to lock all
Smart locks
This feature attempts to help prevent you from locking yourself out of
the vehicle if your key is still in the ignition.
When you open one of the front doors and you lock the vehicle with the
power door lock control (on the driver or passenger door trim panel), all
the doors will lock, then all doors will automatically unlock reminding
you that your key is still in the ignition.
The vehicle can still be locked, with the key in the ignition, using the
manual lock control on the door, locking the driver’s door with a key, or
using the lock control on the remote entry transmitter portion of your
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter.
If both front doors are closed, the vehicle can be locked from any
method, regardless of whether the key is in the ignition or not.
Power door lock/unlock inhibit feature
As a theft deterrent, the power door lock controls and the interior trunk
release control can be disabled 20 seconds after the ignition has been
turned to the off position and the vehicle is locked using any of the
following:
• Remote entry transmitter portion of your Integrated Keyhead
Transmitter,
• Keyless entry keypad (if equipped), or
• Driver power door lock control (Note: The driver’s door must be
open, then closed).
The door lock controls are reenabled when any of the following occurs:
• Unlock using the remote entry transmitter portion of your IKT,
• Unlock using the keyless entry keypad (if equipped),
• Opening any door from the interior of the vehicle, or
93
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
• Turning the key in the ignition to the on position.
Note: This feature is configured off by default. This feature can be
turned on or off using the following procedure:
Before starting, ensure the ignition is in the off position and all vehicle
doors are closed. You must complete Steps 1–5 within 30 seconds or the
procedure will have to be repeated. If the procedure needs to be
repeated, wait a minimum of 30 seconds before beginning again.
1. Place the key in the ignition and turn the ignition to the on position.
2. Press the power door unlock control on the door panel three times.
3. Turn the ignition from the on position to the off position.
4. Press the power door unlock control on the door panel three times.
5. Turn the ignition back to the on position. The horn will chirp one time
to confirm programming mode has been entered and is active.
6. Press the power door lock control on the door panel two times within
five seconds. The horn will chirp one time to confirm the feature is off;
the horn will chirp one time and honk one time to confirm the feature is
on.
7. Turn the ignition from the on position to the off position. The horn
will chirp one time to confirm the programming mode has been exited.
Repeat the procedure to turn the feature on or off.
Autolock feature
The autolock feature will lock all the doors when:
• all the doors are closed,
• the ignition is in the on position,
• you shift into any gear putting the vehicle in motion, and
• the vehicle attains a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h).
The autolock feature repeats when:
• any door is opened then closed while the ignition is in the on position
and the vehicle speed is 9 mph (15 km/h) or lower, and
• the vehicle then attains a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h).
Note: The autolock feature is not available on vehicles equipped with a
manual transmission
94
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
Deactivating/activating autolock feature
Your vehicle comes with the autolock features activated; there are three
methods to enable/disable this feature:
• Through your authorized dealer,
• by using a power door unlock/lock sequence, or
• by using the keyless entry pad (if equipped).
Note: The autolock feature can be activated/deactivated independently
of the autounlock feature.
Before starting, ensure the ignition is in the off position and all vehicle
doors are closed. You must complete Steps 1–5 within 30 seconds or the
procedure will have to be repeated. If the procedure needs to be
repeated, wait a minimum of 30 seconds before beginning again.
1. Place the key in the ignition and
turn the ignition to the on position.
2. Press the power door unlock
control on the door panel three
times.
3. Turn the ignition from the on
position to the off position.
4. Press the power door unlock control on the door panel three times.
5. Turn the ignition back to the on position. The horn will chirp one time
to confirm programming mode has been entered and is active.
6. To enable/disable the autolock feature, press the unlock control, then
press the lock control. The horn will chirp once if autolock was deactivated
or twice (one short and one long chirp) if autolock was activated.
7. Turn the ignition to the off position. The horn will chirp once to
confirm the procedure is complete.
Keyless entry keypad procedure
1. Turn the ignition to the 1 off
position.
2. Close all the doors.
3. Enter factory–set 5–digit entry
code.
4. Press and hold the 3 • 4. While holding the 3 • 4 press the 7 • 8.
5. Release the 7 • 8.
6. Release the 3 • 4.
95
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
The user should receive a horn chirp to indicate the system has been
disabled or a chirp followed by a honk to indicate the system has been
enabled.
Autounlock feature
The autounlock feature will unlock all the doors when:
• the ignition is in the on position, all the doors are closed, and the
vehicle has been in motion at a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h);
• the vehicle has then come to a stop and the ignition is turned to the
off or accessory position; and
• the driver door is opened within 10 minutes of the ignition being
transitioned to the off or accessory position.
Note: The doors will not autounlock if the vehicle has been
electronically locked before the driver door is opened.
Note: The autounlock feature is disabled on vehicles equipped with a
manual transmission.
Deactivating/activating autounlock feature
Your vehicle comes with the autounlock features activated; there are
three methods to enable/disable this feature:
• Through your authorized dealer,
• by using a power door unlock/lock sequence, or
• by using the keyless entry keypad (if equipped).
Note: The autounlock feature can be activated/deactivated
independently of the autolock feature.
Before starting, ensure the ignition is in the off position and all vehicle
doors are closed. You must complete Steps 1–5 within 30 seconds or the
procedure will have to be repeated. If the procedure needs to be
repeated, wait a minimum of 30 seconds before beginning again.
1. Place the key in the ignition and
turn the ignition to the on position.
2. Press the power door unlock
control on the door panel three
times.
3. Turn the ignition from the on
position to the off position.
4. Press the power door unlock control on the door panel three times.
96
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
5. Turn the ignition back to the on position. The horn will chirp one time
to confirm programming mode has been entered and is active.
6. To enable/disable the autounlock feature, press the lock control, then
press the unlock control. The horn will chirp once if autounlock was
deactivated or twice (one short and one long chirp) if autounlock was
activated.
7. Turn the ignition to the off position. The horn will chirp once to
confirm the procedure is complete.
Keyless entry keypad procedure
1. Turn the ignition to the 1 off
position.
2. Close all the doors.
3. Enter factory–set 5–digit entry
code.
4. Press and hold the 3 • 4. While holding the 3 • 4, press and release
the 7 • 8. While still holding the 3 • 4, press and release the 7 • 8 a
second time.
5. Release the 3 • 4.
The user should receive a horn chirp to indicate the system has been
disabled or a chirp followed by a honk to indicate the system has been
enabled.
CHILDPROOF DOOR LOCKS
• When these locks are set, the
rear doors cannot be opened from
the inside.
• The rear doors can be opened
from the outside when the doors
are unlocked.
The childproof locks are located on
rear edge of each rear door and
must be set separately for each
door. Setting the lock for one door
will not automatically set the lock for both doors.
• Insert the key and turn to the lock position (key at an angle) to
engage the childproof locks.
• Insert the key and turn to the unlock position (key horizontal) to
disengage the childproof locks.
97
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
INTERIOR LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT RELEASE
Your vehicle is equipped with a mechanical interior luggage compartment
release handle that provides a means of escape for children and adults in
the event they become locked inside the luggage compartment.
Adults are advised to familiarize themselves with the operation and
location of the release handle.
To open the luggage compartment
door (lid) from within the luggage
compartment, pull the illuminated
“T” shaped handle and push up on
the trunk lid. The handle is
composed of a material that will
glow for hours in darkness following
brief exposure to ambient light.
The “T” shaped handle will be
located either on the luggage
compartment door (lid) or inside
the luggage compartment near the
tail lamps.
WARNING: Keep vehicle
doors and luggage
compartment locked and keep
keys and remote transmitters out
of a child’s reach. Unsupervised
children could lock themselves in
the trunk and risk injury. Children
should be taught not to play in
vehicles.
98
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
WARNING: Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or animals
unattended in the vehicle. On hot days, the temperature in the
trunk or vehicle interior can rise very quickly. Exposure of people or
animals to these high temperatures for even a short time can cause
death or serious heat-related injuries, including brain damage. Small
children are particularly at risk.
REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM
The Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) complies with part 15 of the
FCC rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
The typical operating range for your IKT is approximately 33 feet
(10 meters). A decrease in operating range could be caused by:
• weather conditions,
• nearby radio towers,
• structures around the vehicle, or
• other vehicles parked next to your vehicle.
99
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
The IKT allows you to:
• remotely unlock the vehicle
doors.
• remotely lock all the vehicle
doors.
• remotely open the trunk.
• activate the personal alarm.
• arm and disarm the perimeter
anti-theft system.
• operate the illuminated entry
feature.
The remote entry lock/unlock feature operates in any ignition position
except while the key is held in the start position. The panic feature
operates with the key in the off position.
If there are problems with the remote entry system, make sure to take
ALL Integrated Keyhead Transmitters with you to the authorized
dealer in order to aid in troubleshooting the problem.
Unlocking the doors/two stage unlock
1. Press
and release to unlock the driver’s door. Note: The interior
lamps will illuminate.
and release again within five seconds to unlock all the doors.
2. Press
The remote entry system activates the illuminated entry feature; this
feature turns on the lamps for 25 seconds or until the ignition is turned
to the on position.
The inside lights will not turn off if:
• they have been turned on using the dimmer control or
• any door is open.
The battery saver feature will turn off the interior lamps 30 minutes after
the ignition is turned to the off position.
Two stage unlocking may be disabled or re-enabled by simultaneously
pressing the
and
controls on the IKT for four seconds (disabling
two stage unlock allows all vehicle doors to unlock simultaneously). The
turn lamps will flash twice to indicate that two-stage unlock was enabled
or disabled.
100
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
Locking the doors
1. Press
and release to lock all the doors. The turn lamps will flash.
and release again within three seconds to confirm that all
2. Press
the doors are closed. Note: The doors will lock again, the horn will chirp
and the turn lamps will flash once if all the doors and trunk are closed.
Note: If any door or the trunk is not closed, or if the hood is not closed
in vehicles equipped with the perimeter alarm feature, the horn will
chirp twice and the lamps will not flash.
Car finder
twice within three seconds. The horn will chirp and the turn
Press
lamps will flash. It is recommended that this method be used to locate
your vehicle, rather than using the panic alarm.
Sounding a panic alarm
to activate the alarm. The horn will sound and the turn lamps
Press
will flash for a maximum of three minutes. Press again or turn the
ignition to the on position to deactivate, or wait for the alarm to time out
in three minutes.
Note: The panic alarm will only operate when the ignition is in the off
position.
Opening the trunk
Press
twice within three seconds to open the trunk.
• Ensure that the trunk is closed and latched before driving your
vehicle. Failure to properly latch the trunk may cause objects to fall
out or block the driver’s rear view.
Replacing the battery
The Integrated Keyhead Transmitter uses one coin type three-volt
lithium battery CR2032 or equivalent.
101
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
To replace the battery:
1. Twist a thin coin in the slot of the
IKT near the key ring in order to
remove the battery cover.
2. Do not wipe off any grease on the
battery terminals on the back
surface of the circuit board.
3. Remove the old battery. Note: Please refer to local regulations when
disposing of transmitter batteries.
4. Insert the new battery. Refer to the instructions inside the IKT for the
correct orientation of the battery. Press the battery down to ensure that
the battery is fully seated in the battery housing cavity.
5. Snap the battery cover back onto the key.
Note: Replacement of the battery will not cause the IKT to become
deprogrammed from your vehicle. The IKT should operate normally after
battery replacement.
Replacing lost Integrated Keyhead Transmitters (IKTs)
If you would like to have your Integrated Keyhead Transmitters
reprogrammed because you lost one, or would like to buy additional
IKTs, you can either reprogram them yourself, or take all IKTs to your
authorized dealer for reprogramming.
How to reprogram your Integrated Keyhead Transmitters (IKTs)
To program a new Integrated Keyhead Transmitter yourself, refer to
Programming spare keys in the SecuriLock™ passive anti-theft
system section of this chapter. Note: At least two IKTs are required to
perform this procedure yourself.
102
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
Illuminated entry
The interior lamps and puddle lamps (if equipped) illuminate when the
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter is used to unlock the door(s).
The illuminated entry system will turn off the interior lights if:
• the ignition is turned to the on position,
• the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter lock control is pressed,
• The vehicle is locked using the keyless entry keypad (if equipped), or
• after 25 seconds of illumination.
The inside lights will not turn off if:
• they have been turned on with the dimmer control, or
• any door is open.
Perimeter lamps illuminated entry
With the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter system, the following items will
control on the transmitter is pressed:
illuminate when the
• Head lamps
• Park lamps
• Tail lamps
The lamps will automatically turn off:
• if the ignition switch is turned to the 3 (on) position,
• The vehicle is locked using the keyless entry keypad (if equipped), or
• after 25 seconds of illumination.
Note: On some vehicles, the perimeter lamps illuminated entry feature
will not activate in daylight conditions.
Deactivating/activating perimeter lamps illuminated entry
You may enable/disable this feature by having your vehicle serviced by
your authorized dealer.
You may also perform the following power door lock sequence to
enable/disable the perimeter lamps feature. Note: Before starting, ensure
the ignition is in the 1 (off) position and all vehicle doors are closed. You
must complete Steps 1–5 within 30 seconds or the procedure will have
to be repeated. If the procedure needs to be repeated, wait a minimum
of 30 seconds before beginning again.
103
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
1. Place the key in the ignition and
turn the ignition to the 3 (on)
position.
2. Press the power door unlock
control on the door panel three
times.
3. Turn the ignition from the 3 (on)
position to the 1 (off) position.
4. Press the power door unlock control on the door panel three times.
5. Turn the ignition back to the 3 (on) position. The horn will chirp one
time to confirm programming mode has been entered and is active.
6. Press the power door unlock control twice within five seconds.
Note: The horn will chirp once to indicate the perimeter lighting feature
has been deactivated. The horn will chirp once and honk once (one short
and one long) to indicate the perimeter lighting feature has been
activated.
7. Turn the ignition to the 1 (off) position to exit the procedure.
Note: The horn will chirp once to confirm the procedure is complete.
Illuminated exit
• When all vehicle doors are closed and the key is removed from the
ignition, the interior dome lamps (and the exterior mirror puddle
lamps, if equipped) will illuminate.
The lights will turn off if all the doors remain closed and
• 25 seconds elapse, or
• the key is inserted in the ignition.
Battery saver
The battery saver will shut off the interior lamps 30 minutes after the
ignition has been turned to the 1 (off) position.
• If the dome lamps were turned on using the panel dimmer control, the
battery saver will shut them off 30 minutes after the ignition has been
turned to the 1 (off) position.
• If the courtesy lamps were turned on because one of the vehicle doors
or the trunk was opened, the battery saver will shut off them off
10 minutes after the ignition has been turned to the 1 (off) position.
• The battery saver will shut off the headlamps 10 minutes after the
ignition has been turned to the 1 (off) position.
104
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
You can use the keyless entry
keypad to:
• lock or unlock the doors without
using a key.
• open the trunk.
The keypad can be operated with the factory set 5–digit entry code; this
code is located on the owner’s wallet card in the glove box and is
available from your authorized dealer. You can also create up to three of
your own 5–digit personal entry codes.
When pressing the controls on the keypad, press the middle of the
controls to ensure a good activation.
Programming a personal entry code
To create your own personal entry code:
1. Enter the factory set code.
2. Within five seconds press the 1 • 2 on the keypad.
3. Enter your personal 5-digit code. Each number must be entered
within five seconds of each other.
4. The doors will lock then unlock to confirm that your personal keycode
has been programmed to the module.
Tips:
• Do not set a code that uses five of the same number.
• Do not use five numbers in sequential order.
• The factory set code will work even if you have set your own personal
code.
Erasing personal code
1. Enter the factory set 5–digit code.
2. Within five seconds, press the 1 • 2 on the keypad and release.
3. Press and hold the 1 • 2 for two seconds. This must be done within
five seconds of completing Step 2.
All personal codes are now erased and only the factory set 5–digit code
will work.
Anti-scan feature
If the wrong code has been entered seven times (35 consecutive button
presses), the keypad will go into an anti-scan mode. This mode disables
the keypad for one minute and the keypad lamp will flash.
105
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
The anti-scan feature will turn off after:
• one minute of keypad inactivity.
control on the remote entry transmitter portion of
• pressing the
your Integrated Keyhead Transmitter.
• the ignition is turned on.
Unlocking and locking the doors using keyless entry
To unlock the driver’s door, enter the factory set 5-digit code or your
personal code. Each number must be pressed within five seconds of each
other. The interior lamps will illuminate. Note: If the two-stage unlocking
feature is disabled, all doors will unlock; for more information regarding
two-stage unlocking, refer to the Unlocking the doors/Two stage unlock
section earlier in this chapter.
To unlock all doors, enter the factory set code or your personal code,
then press the 3 • 4 control within five seconds.
To open the trunk, enter the factory set code or your personal code,
then press the 5 • 6 control within five seconds.
To lock all doors, press the 7 • 8 and the 9 • 0 at the same time (with
the driver’s door closed). You do not need to enter the keypad code
first.
SECURILOCK™ PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM
SecuriLock™ passive anti-theft system is an engine immobilization
system. This system is designed to help prevent the engine from being
started unless a coded Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT)
programmed to your vehicle is used. The use of the wrong type of
coded key may lead to a “no-start” condition.
Your vehicle comes with two coded Integrated Keyhead Transmitters;
additional coded IKTs may be purchased from your authorized dealer.
Standard SecuriLock™ keys without remote entry transmitter
functionality can also be purchased from your authorized dealer if
desired. The authorized dealer can program your spare IKTs to your
vehicle or you can program the IKTs yourself. Refer to Programming
spare keys for instructions on how to program the coded key.
Note: The SecuriLock™ passive anti-theft system is not compatible with
non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems. Use of these systems may
result in vehicle starting problems and a loss of security protection.
106
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
Note: Large metallic objects, electronic devices that are used to
purchase gasoline or similar items, or a second coded key on the same
key chain may cause vehicle starting issues. You need to prevent these
objects from touching the coded IKT while starting the engine. These
objects will not cause damage to the coded IKT, but may cause a
momentary issue if they are too close to the IKT when starting the
engine. If a problem occurs, turn the ignition off, remove all objects on
the key chain away from the coded IKT and restart the engine.
Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key in the vehicle. Always
take your keys and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle.
Anti-theft indicator
The anti-theft indicator is located in the instrument panel cluster.
• When the ignition is in the off
position, the indicator will flash
once every two seconds to
indicate the SecuriLock™ system
is functioning as a theft
deterrent.
• When the ignition is in the on position, the indicator will glow for
three seconds to indicate normal system functionality.
If a problem occurs with the SecuriLock™ system, the indicator will flash
rapidly or glow steadily when the ignition is in the on position. If this
occurs, the vehicle will not start and should be taken to an authorized
dealer for service.
Automatic arming
The vehicle is armed immediately after switching the ignition to the off
position.
The theft indicator will flash every
two seconds to act as a theft
deterrent when the vehicle is
armed.
Automatic disarming
The vehicle is disarmed immediately after the ignition is turned to the on
position.
The theft indicator will illuminate for three seconds and then go out. If
the theft indicator stays on for an extended period of time or flashes
rapidly, have the system serviced by your authorized dealer.
107
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
Replacement Integrated Keyless Transmitters (IKT) and coded keys
Note: Your vehicle comes equipped with two Integrated Keyhead
Transmitters (IKTs). The IKT functions as both a programmed ignition
key that operates all the locks and starts the vehicle, as well as a remote
keyless entry transmitter. A maximum of eight coded keys can be
programmed to your vehicle; only four of these eight keys can be IKTs
with remote entry functionality.
If your IKTs or standard SecuriLock™ coded keys are lost or stolen and
you don’t have an extra coded key, you will need to have your vehicle
towed to an authorized dealer. The key codes need to be erased from
your vehicle and new coded keys will need to be programmed.
Replacing coded keys can be very costly. Store an extra programmed key
away from the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent any
inconveniences. Please visit an authorized dealer to purchase additional
spare or replacement keys.
Programming spare keys
You can program your own Integrated Keyhead Transmitters or standard
SecuriLock™ coded keys to your vehicle. This procedure will program
both the engine immobilizer keycode and the remote entry transmitter
portion of the IKT to your vehicle. Note: A maximum of eight coded
keys can be programmed to your vehicle; only four of these eight can be
IKTs with remote entry functionality.
Tips:
• Only use Integrated Keyhead Transmitters (IKTs) or standard
SecuriLock™ keys.
• You must have two previously programmed coded keys (keys that
already operate your vehicle’s engine) and the new unprogrammed
key(s) readily accessible.
• If two previously programmed coded keys are not available, you must
take your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have the spare key(s)
programmed.
108
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
Please read and understand the
entire procedure before you begin.
1. Insert the first previously
programmed coded key into the
ignition.
2. Turn the ignition from the 1 (off)
position to the 3 (on) position. Keep
the ignition in the 3 (on) position
for at least three seconds, but no more than 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition to the 1 (off) position and remove the first coded
key from the ignition.
4. Within 10 seconds of turning the ignition to the 1 (off) position, insert
the second previously coded key into the ignition.
5. Turn the ignition from the 1 (off) position to the 3 (on) position. Keep
the ignition in the 3 (on) position for at least three seconds, but no more
than 10 seconds.
6. Turn the ignition to the 1 (off) position and remove the second
previously programmed coded key from the ignition.
7. Within 20 seconds of turning the ignition to the 1 (off) position and
removing the previously programmed coded key, insert the new
unprogrammed key (new key/valet key) into the ignition.
8. Turn the ignition from the 1 (off) position to the 3 (on) position. Keep
the ignition in the 3 (on) position for at least six seconds.
9. Remove the newly programmed coded key from the ignition.
If the key has been successfully programmed it will start the vehicle’s
engine and will operate the remote entry system (if the new key is an
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter). The theft indicator light will illuminate
for three seconds and then go out to indicate successful programming.
If the key was not successfully programmed, it will not start your
vehicle’s engine and/or will not operate the remote entry features. The
theft indicator light may flash on and off. Wait 20 seconds and you may
repeat Steps 1 through 8. If failure repeats, bring your vehicle to your
authorized dealer to have the new key(s) programmed.
To program additional new unprogrammed key(s), wait 20 seconds and
then repeat this procedure from Step 1.
109
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
PERIMETER ALARM SYSTEM
The perimeter anti-theft system will help protect your vehicle from
unauthorized entry.
If there is any potential perimeter anti-theft problem with your vehicle,
ensure ALL Integrated Keyhead Transmitters are brought to the
authorized dealer to aid in troubleshooting.
Arming the system
When armed, this system will respond if unauthorized entry is
attempted. When unauthorized entry occurs, the system will flash the
turn signal lamps and will sound the horn.
The system is ready to arm whenever the key is in the 1 (off) position,
or is removed from the ignition. Either of the following actions will
prearm the alarm system:
control on the remote entry transmitter portion of your
• Press the
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter.
When you press the lock control twice within three seconds on the
remote entry transmitter portion of your IKT, the horn will chirp once to
let you know that all doors, the hood and the trunk are closed. If any of
these are not closed, the horn will chirp twice to warn you that a door,
the hood or the trunk is still open.
• Press the driver or passenger
interior door lock control while
the door is open, then close the
door.
• Press the 7 • 8 and the 9 • 0
controls on the keyless entry
keypad (if equipped) at the same
time to lock the doors (driver’s
door must be closed).
There is a 20 second countdown when any of the above actions occur
before the vehicle becomes armed.
Each door, the hood or the trunk is armed individually, and if any are
open, they must be closed for the system to enter the 20 second
countdown.
The turn signal lamps will flash once when all doors, the hood and the
trunk are closed indicating the vehicle is locked and entering the
20 second countdown.
110
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
Disarming the system
You can disarm the system by any of the following actions:
• Unlock the doors by using the remote entry transmitter portion of
your Integrated Keyhead Transmitter.
• Unlocking the doors using the keyless entry keypad (if equipped).
• Unlock the driver’s door with a key. Turn the key full rearward
(toward the rear of the vehicle) to ensure the alarm disarms.
• Turn ignition to the 3 (on) position with a valid SecuriLock™ key.
• Press the panic control on the remote entry transmitter portion of
your IKT. This will only shut off the horn and turn lamps when the
alarm is sounding. The alarm system will still be armed.
Pressing the power door unlock control within the 20 second prearmed
mode will return the vehicle to a disarmed state.
Triggering the anti-theft system
The armed system will be triggered if:
• Any door, the hood or the trunk is opened without using the door key
or the remote entry transmitter portion of your IKT.
• The ignition is turned to the 3 (on) position with an invalid
SecuriLock™ key.
111
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
SEATING
WARNING: Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to
slide under the seat’s safety belt, resulting in severe personal
injuries in the event of a collision.
WARNING: Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to
reduce the risk of injury in a collision or sudden stop.
WARNING: Before returning the seatback to its original
position, make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped
behind the seatback. After returning the seatback to its original
position, pull on the seatback to ensure that it has fully latched. An
unlatched seat may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or
collision.
Adjustable head restraints
Your vehicle is equipped with front row outboard head restraints that are
vertically adjustable.
WARNING: To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash, the driver and passenger occupants should not sit in
and/or operate the vehicle, until the head restraint is placed in its
proper position. The driver should never adjust the head restraint
while the vehicle is in motion.
The adjustable head restraints
consist of :
• a trimmed energy absorbing foam
and structure (1),
• two steel stems (2),
• a guide sleeve adjust/release
button (3),
• and a guide sleeve unlock/remove
button (4).
112
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
To adjust the head restraint, do the following:
1. Adjust the seatback to an upright driving/riding position.
2. Raise the head restraint by
pulling up on the head restraint.
3. Lower the head restraint by
pressing and holding the guide
sleeve adjust/release button and
pushing down on the head restraint.
Properly adjust the head restraint so that the top of the head restraint is
even with the top of your head and positioned as close as possible to the
back of your head. For occupants of extremely tall stature, adjust the
head restraint to its full up position.
WARNING: The adjustable head restraint is a safety device.
Whenever possible it should be installed and properly adjusted
when the seat is occupied.
113
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
To remove the adjustable head restraint, do the following:
1. Pull up the head restraint until it
reaches the highest adjustment
position.
2. Simultaneously press and hold
both the adjust/release button and
the unlock/remove button, then pull
up on the head restraint.
To reinstall the adjustable head restraint, do the following:
1. Insert the two stems into the
guide sleeve collars.
2. Push the head restraint down
until it locks.
Properly adjust the head restraint so that the top of the head restraint is
even with the top of your head and positioned as close as possible to the
back of your head. For occupants of extremely tall stature, adjust the
head restraint to its full up position.
114
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
WARNING: To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash, head restraints must be installed properly.
Using the manual lumbar support (if equipped)
The lumbar control is located on the
side of the seat cushion.
Turn to adjust lumbar support.
Adjusting the front manual seat (if equipped)
WARNING: Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when the
vehicle is moving.
WARNING: Always drive and ride with your seatback upright
and the lap belt snug and low across the hips.
Lift handle to move seat forward or
backward.
115
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Pump the handle upwards to raise
the cushion and pump downward to
lower the cushion to the desired
location.
Pull lever up to adjust seatback.
Folding down the front passenger seatback (if equipped)
The front passenger seatback can be folded to a horizontal position to
make room for a long load. To fold the seatback:
1. Move the seat as far back as possible.
2. Push the head restraint release button and move the head restraint
fully down.
3. Pull up on the recliner handle located on the outboard side of the
seat.
4. Without releasing the handle, push the back of the seat forward until
flat.
5. Move the seat as far forward as possible.
WARNING: Cover sharp edges on the load to help prevent
injury to occupants. Secure the load to help prevent shifting
during sudden stops.
116
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
WARNING: Before returning the seatback to its original
position, make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped
behind the seatback. After returning the seatback to its original
position, pull on the seatback to ensure that it has fully latched. An
unlatched seat may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or
collision.
Adjusting the front power seat (if equipped)
WARNING: Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when the
vehicle is moving.
WARNING: Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to
reduce the risk of injury in a collision or sudden stop.
WARNING: Always drive and ride with your seatback upright
and the lap belt snug and low across the hips.
WARNING: Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to
slide under the seat’s safety belt, resulting in severe personal
injuries in the event of a collision.
WARNING: Sitting improperly out of position or with the seat
back reclined too far can take off weight from the seat cushion
and affect the decision of the front passenger sensing system, resulting
in serious injury or death in a crash. Always sit upright against your
seatback, with your feet on the floor.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of possible serious injury: Do not
hang objects off seat back or stow objects in the seatback map
pocket (if equipped) when a child is in the front passenger seat. Do
not place objects underneath the front passenger seat or between the
seat and the center console (if equipped). Check the “passenger airbag
off” or “pass airbag off” indicator lamp for proper airbag status. Refer
to Front passenger sensing system section for additional details.
Failure to follow these instructions may interfere with the front
passenger seat sensing system.
117
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
The control is located on the outboard side of the seat cushion.
Move the switch in the direction of
the arrows to raise or lower the
front portion of the seat cushion.
Move the switch in the direction of
the arrows to raise or lower the rear
portion of the seat cushion.
Press the switch in the direction of
the arrows to move the seat
forward, backward, up or down.
Heated seats (if equipped)
WARNING: Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord
injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical
conditions, must exercise care when using the seat heater. The seat
heater may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods of time. Do not place anything on the seat that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion, because this may
cause the seat heater to overheat. Do not puncture the seat with pins,
needles, or other pointed objects because this may damage the heating
element which may cause the seat heater to overheat. An overheated
seat may cause serious personal injury.
118
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Note: Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat
• Operate the seat heater if water or any other liquid is spilled on the
seat. Allow the seat to dry thoroughly.
The heated seats will only function when the ignition is in the on
position.
To operate the heated seats:
• Push the control located on the
climate control system panel once
to activate high heat.
• Push twice to activate low heat.
• Push a third time to deactivate.
The indicator light on the control will illuminate when activated. For low
heat, one light will be lit; for high heat, both lights will be lit.
REAR SEATS
Split-folding rear seatbacks
One or both rear seatbacks can be folded down to provide additional
cargo space.
To lower the seatback(s), pull the
release handle(s) located inside the
trunk.
119
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Fold the seatback(s) down.
WARNING: Before returning the seatback to its original
position, make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped
behind the seatback. After returning the seatback to its original
position, pull on the seatback to ensure that it has fully latched. An
unlatched seat may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or
collision.
Make sure that the safety belt for the rear center passenger is properly
routed over the rear seatback.
120
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Seat-mounted cup holders and armrest storage compartment
Your vehicle may be equipped with
cup holders in the rear seat armrest.
To access the cup holders, fold the
armrest down.
WARNING: Use only soft cups in the cup holder. Hard objects
can injure you in a collision.
SAFETY RESTRAINTS
Personal Safety System™
The Personal Safety System™ provides an improved overall level of
frontal crash protection to front seat occupants and is designed to help
further reduce the risk of airbag-related injuries. The system is able to
analyze different occupant conditions and crash severity before activating
the appropriate safety devices to help better protect a range of
occupants in a variety of frontal crash situations.
Your vehicle’s Personal Safety System™ consists of:
• Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints.
• Front outboard safety belts with pretensioners, energy management
retractors (first row only), and safety belt usage sensors.
• Driver’s seat position sensor.
• Front passenger sensing system
• “Passenger airbag off” or “pass airbag off” indicator lamp
• Front crash severity sensor.
• Restraints Control Module (RCM) with impact and safing sensors.
• Restraint system warning light and back-up tone.
• The electrical wiring for the airbags, crash sensor(s), safety belt
pretensioners, front safety belt usage sensors, driver seat position
sensor, front passenger sensing system, and indicator lights.
121
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
How does the Personal Safety System™ work?
The Personal Safety System™ can adapt the deployment strategy of your
vehicle’s safety devices according to crash severity and occupant
conditions. A collection of crash and occupant sensors provides
information to the Restraints Control Module (RCM). During a crash, the
RCM may activate the safety belt pretensioners and/or either one or both
stages of the dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints based on crash
severity and occupant conditions.
The fact that the pretensioners or airbags did not activate for both front
seat occupants in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with
the system. Rather, it means the Personal Safety System™ determined
the accident conditions (crash severity, belt usage, etc.) were not
appropriate to activate these safety devices. Front airbags are designed
to activate only in frontal and near-frontal collisions (not rollovers, side
impacts or rear impacts) unless the collision causes sufficient
longitudinal deceleration. The pretensioners are designed to activate in
frontal and near-frontal collisions, and in side collisions.
Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints
The dual-stage airbags offer the capability to tailor the level of airbag
inflation energy. A lower, less forceful energy level is provided for more
common, moderate-severity impacts. A higher energy level is used for
the most severe impacts. Refer to Airbag supplemental restraints
(SRS) section in this chapter.
Front crash severity sensor
The front crash severity sensor enhances the ability to detect the
severity of an impact. Positioned up front, it provides valuable
information early in the crash event on the severity of the impact. This
allows your Personal Safety System™ to distinguish between different
levels of crash severity and modify the deployment strategy of the
dual-stage airbags and safety belt pretensioners.
Driver’s seat position sensor
The driver’s seat position sensor allows your Personal Safety System™ to
tailor the deployment level of the driver dual-stage airbag based on seat
position. The system is designed to help protect smaller drivers sitting
close to the driver airbag by providing a lower airbag output level.
Front passenger sensing system
For airbags to do their job they must inflate with great force, and this
force can pose a potentially deadly risk to occupants that are very close
122
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
to the airbag when it begins to inflate. For some occupants, this occurs
because they are initially sitting very close to the airbag. For other
occupants, this occurs when the occupant is not properly restrained by
safety belts or child safety seats and they move forward during pre-crash
braking. The most effective way to reduce the risk of unnecessary
injuries is to make sure all occupants are properly restrained. Accident
statistics suggest that children are much safer when properly restrained
in the rear seating positions than in the front.
WARNING: Air bags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
NEVER place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active air
bag. If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move
the seat all the way back.
WARNING: When possible, all children 12 years old and under
should be properly restrained in a rear seating position.
The front passenger sensing system can automatically turn off the front
passenger airbag and passenger seat-mounted side airbag. The system is
designed to help protect small (child size) occupants from frontal airbag
deployments when they are seated or restrained in the front passenger
seat contrary to proper child-seating or restraint usage
recommendations. Even with this technology, parents are STRONGLY
encouraged to always properly restrain children in the rear seat. The
sensor also turns off the passenger front airbag and passenger
seat-mounted side airbag when the passenger seat is empty and the
safety belt is unbuckled, or when a child or a small person occupies the
front passenger seat and the safety belt is unbuckled.
Front safety belt usage sensors
The front safety belt usage sensors detect whether or not the driver and
front outboard passenger safety belts are fastened. This information
allows your Personal Safety System™ to tailor the airbag deployment
and safety belt pretensioner activation depending upon safety belt usage.
Front safety belt pretensioners
The safety belt pretensioners at the front outboard seating positions are
designed to tighten the safety belts firmly against the occupant’s body
during frontal collisions and in side collisions when the side curtains and
side airbags are activated. This helps increase the effectiveness of the
safety belts. In frontal collisions, the safety belt pretensioners can be
activated alone or, if the collision is of sufficient severity, together with
the front airbags.
123
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Front safety belt energy management retractors
The front outboard safety belt energy management retractors allow
webbing to be pulled out of the retractor in a gradual and controlled
manner in response to the occupant’s forward momentum. This helps
reduce the risk of force-related injuries to the occupant’s chest by
limiting the load on the occupant. Refer to Energy management
feature- front outboard section in this chapter.
Determining if the Personal Safety System™ is operational
The Personal Safety System™ uses a warning light in the instrument
cluster or a back-up tone to indicate the condition of the system. Refer
to the Warning lights and chimes section in the Instrument Cluster
chapter. Routine maintenance of the Personal Safety System™ is not
required.
The Restraints Control Module (RCM) monitors its own internal circuits
and the circuits for the airbag supplemental restraints, crash sensor(s),
safety belt pretensioners, front safety belt buckle sensors, driver seat
position sensor, and front passenger sensing system. In addition, the
RCM also monitors the restraints warning light in the instrument cluster.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following.
• The warning light will either flash or stay lit.
• The warning light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is
turned on.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and warning light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the Personal
Safety System™ serviced at an authorized dealer immediately. Unless
serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a
collision.
Safety belt precautions
WARNING: Always drive and ride with your seatback upright
and the lap belt snug and low across the hips.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of injury, make sure children sit
where they can be properly restrained.
124
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
WARNING: Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap
while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the
child from injury in a collision.
WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver,
should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.
WARNING: It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped
with seats and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a safety belt properly.
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt.
WARNING: Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific
safety belt assembly which is made up of one buckle and one
tongue that are designed to be used as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt
on the outside shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt under the
arm. 2) Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside
shoulder. 3) Never use a single belt for more than one person.
WARNING: When possible, all children 12 years old and under
should be properly restrained in a rear seating position.
WARNING: Front and rear seat occupants, including pregnant
women, should wear safety belts for optimum protection in an
accident.
125
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Combination lap and shoulder belts
1. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) until you hear a snap and feel
it latch. Make sure the tongue is
securely fastened in the buckle.
2. To unfasten, push the release
button and remove the tongue from
the buckle.
All restraints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder belts.
While you are fastened in the safety belt, the combination lap/shoulder
belt adjusts to your movement. However, if you brake hard, turn hard, or
if your vehicle receives an impact of 5 mph (8 km/h) or more, the safety
belt will become locked and help reduce your forward movement.
Energy management feature — front outboard
• This vehicle has a safety belt system with an energy management
feature at the front seats to help further reduce the risk of injury in
the event of a head-on collision.
• The energy management feature has a retractor assembly that is
designed to extend the safety belt webbing in a controlled manner.
This helps reduce the belt force acting on the user’s chest.
WARNING: Failure to inspect and replace if necessary the belt
and retractor assembly after an accident could increase the risk
of injury in a collision.
126
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
All safety restraints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder
belts. All of the passenger combination lap and shoulder belts have two
types of locking modes described below:
Vehicle sensitive mode
This is the normal retractor mode, which allows free shoulder belt length
adjustment to your movements and locking in response to vehicle
movement. For example, if the driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner
sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of approximately 5 mph
(8 km/h) or more, the combination safety belts will lock to help reduce
forward movement of the driver and passengers.
Automatic locking mode
How to use the automatic locking mode
• Buckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt.
• Grasp the shoulder portion and
pull downward until the entire
belt is pulled out.
• Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking
sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking
mode.
127
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
When to use the automatic locking mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The belt will
still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The automatic
locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt.
This mode should be used any time a child safety seat, except a
booster, is installed in passenger front or rear seating positions. Children
12 years old and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating
position whenever possible. Refer to Safety restraints for children or
Safety seats for children later in this chapter.
How to disengage the automatic locking mode
WARNING: Ford Motor Company recommends that all
passenger safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware should
be inspected by an authorized dealer after any collision to verify that
the ⬙automatic locking retractor⬙ feature for child seats is still working
properly. Safety belt assemblies should be inspected by an authorized
dealer and must be replaced if either damage or improper operation is
noted. Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could
increase the risk of injury in a collision.
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract
completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
Safety belt pretensioner
Your vehicle is equipped with safety belt pretensioners at the driver and
front outboard passenger seating positions.
The safety belt pretensioner tightens the safety belts firmly against the
occupant’s body at the start of the crash.
WARNING: The driver and front passenger safety belt system
(including retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be
replaced if the vehicle is involved in a collision that results in
deployment of front airbags, seat-mounted side airbags and side air
curtains, and safety belt pretensioners.
128
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Safety belt height adjustment
Your vehicle has safety belt height
adjustments at the front outboard
seating positions. Adjust the height
of the shoulder belt so the belt rests
across the middle of your shoulder.
To adjust the shoulder belt height,
pull on the center button and slide
the height adjuster up or down.
Release the button and pull down
on the height adjuster to make sure
it is locked in place.
WARNING: Position the safety belt height adjusters so that the
belt rests across the middle of your shoulder. Failure to adjust
the safety belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the safety
belt and increase the risk of injury in a collision.
Safety belt extension assembly
If the safety belt is too short when fully extended, there is an 8 inch
(20 cm) safety belt extension assembly that can be added (part number
611C22). This assembly can be obtained from an authorized dealer.
Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety
belt. Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on
the label. Also, use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too
short for you when fully extended.
WARNING: Do not use extensions to change the fit of the
shoulder belt across the torso.
Safety belt warning light and indicator chime
The safety belt warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster and a
chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten their safety belts.
129
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Conditions of operation
If...
The driver’s safety belt is not
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the on
position...
The driver’s safety belt is
buckled while the indicator
light is illuminated and the
warning chime is sounding...
The driver’s safety belt is
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the on
position...
Then...
The safety belt warning light
illuminates 1-2 minutes and the
warning chime sounds 4-8 seconds.
The safety belt warning light and
warning chime turn off.
The safety belt warning light and
indicator chime remain off.
Belt-Minder姞
The Belt-Minder威 feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt
warning function. This feature provides additional reminders by
intermittently sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning
light in the instrument cluster when the driver’s and front passenger’s
safety belt is unbuckled.
The Belt-Minder威 feature uses information from the front passenger
sensing system to determine if a front seat passenger is present and
therefore potentially in need of a warning. To avoid activating the
Belt-Minder威 feature for objects placed in the front passenger seat,
warnings will only be given to large front seat occupants as determined
by the front passenger sensing system.
Both the driver’s and passenger’s safety belt usages are monitored and
either may activate the Belt-Minder威 feature. The warnings are the same
for the driver and the front passenger. If the Belt-Minder威 warnings have
expired (warnings for approximately five minutes) for one occupant
(driver or front passenger), the other occupant can still activate the
Belt-Minder威 feature.
When the Belt-Minder威 feature is activated, the safety belt warning light
illuminates and the warning chime sounds for six seconds every
30 seconds, repeating for approximately five minutes or until the safety
belts are buckled.
130
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
The Belt-Minder威 feature uses two different warning chimes. During the
first minute of activation, the warning chime will sound once every
second. The remaining warning chimes will sound twice every second
while the system is activated.
If...
The driver’s and front
passenger’s safety belts are
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the on
position or less than
1-2 minutes have elapsed since
the ignition switch has been
turned on...
The driver’s or front
passenger’s safety belt is not
buckled when the vehicle has
reached at least 3 mph
(5 km/h) and 1-2 minutes have
elapsed since the ignition
switch has been turned to on...
The driver’s or front
passenger’s safety belt becomes
unbuckled for approximately
1 minute while the vehicle is
traveling at least 3 mph
(5 km/h) and more than
1-2 minutes have elapsed since
the ignition switch has been
turned to on...
Then...
The Belt-Minder威 feature will not
activate.
The Belt-Minder威 feature is activated
- the safety belt warning light
illuminates and the warning chime
sounds for six seconds every
30 seconds, repeating for
approximately five minutes or until
the safety belts are buckled.
The Belt-Minder威 feature is activated
- the safety belt warning light
illuminates and the warning chime
sounds for six seconds every
30 seconds, repeating for
approximately five minutes or until
the safety belts are buckled.
131
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
The following are reasons most often given for not wearing safety belts
(All statistics based on U.S. data):
Reasons given...
“Crashes are rare events”
“I’m not going far”
“Belts are uncomfortable”
“I was in a hurry”
“Safety belts don’t work”
“Traffic is light”
“Belts wrinkle my clothes”
“The people I’m with don’t
wear belts”
132
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Consider...
36700 crashes occur every day. The
more we drive, the more we are
exposed to “rare” events, even for
good drivers. 1 in 4 of us will be
seriously injured in a crash during
our lifetime.
3 of 4 fatal crashes occur within 25
miles (40 km) of home.
We design our safety belts to enhance
comfort. If you are uncomfortable try different positions for the safety
belt upper anchorage and seatback
which should be as upright as
possible; this can improve comfort.
Prime time for an accident.
Belt-Minder威 reminds us to take a few
seconds to buckle up.
Safety belts, when used properly,
reduce risk of death to front seat
occupants by 45% in cars, and by
60% in light trucks.
Nearly 1 of 2 deaths occur in
single-vehicle crashes, many when
no other vehicles are around.
Possibly, but a serious crash can do
much more than wrinkle your clothes,
particularly if you are unbelted.
Set the example, teen deaths occur 4
times more often in vehicles with
TWO or MORE people. Children and
younger brothers/sisters imitate
behavior they see.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Reasons given...
“I have an airbag”
“I’d rather be thrown clear”
Consider...
Airbags offer greater protection when
used with safety belts. Frontal airbags
are not designed to inflate in rear and
side crashes or rollovers.
Not a good idea. People who are
ejected are 40 times more likely
to DIE. Safety belts help prevent
ejection, WE CAN’T “PICK OUR
CRASH”.
WARNING: Do not sit on top of a buckled safety belt or insert a
latchplate into the buckle to avoid the Belt-Minder威 chime. To
do so may adversely affect the performance of the vehicle’s air bag
system.
One-time disable
If at any time the driver/front passenger quickly buckles then unbuckles
the safety belt for that seating position, the Belt-Minder威 is disabled for
the current ignition cycle. The Belt-Minder威 feature will enable during
the same ignition cycle if the occupant buckles and remains buckled for
approximately 30 seconds. Confirmation is not given for the one time
disable.
Deactivating/activating the Belt-Minder姞 feature
The driver and front passenger Belt-Minder威 are
deactivated/activated independently. When deactivating/activating
one seating position, do not buckle the other position as this will
terminate the process.
Read Steps 1 - 4 thoroughly before proceeding with the
deactivation/activation programming procedure.
Note: The driver and front passenger Belt-Minder威 features must be
disabled/enabled separately. Both cannot be disable/enabled during the
same key cycle.
The driver and front passenger Belt-Minder威 features can be
deactivated/activated by performing the following procedure:
133
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Before following the procedure, make sure that:
• The parking brake is set
• The gearshift is in N (Neutral) (manual transmission)
• The gearshift is in P (Park) (automatic transmission)
• The ignition switch is in the off position
• The driver and front passenger safety belts are unbuckled
WARNING: While the design allows you to deactivate your
Belt-Minder威, this system is designed to improve your chances of
being safely belted and surviving an accident. We recommend you
leave the Belt-Minder威 system activated for yourself and others who
may use the vehicle. To reduce the risk of injury, do not
deactivate/activate the Belt-Minder威 feature while driving the vehicle.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the on position. DO NOT START THE
ENGINE.
2. Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off (Approximately
1–2 minutes).
• Step 3 must be completed within 50 seconds after the safety belt
warning light turns off.
3. For the seating position being disabled, at a moderate speed, buckle
then unbuckle the safety belt nine times, ending in the unbuckled state.
Step 3 must be completed within 50 seconds after the safety belt
warning light turns off.
• After Step 3, the safety belt warning light will be turned on for three
seconds.
4. Within approximately seven seconds of the light turning off, buckle
then unbuckle the safety belt.
• This will disable the Belt-Minder威 feature for that seating position if it
is currently enabled. As confirmation, the safety belt warning light will
flash four times per second for three seconds.
• This will enable the Belt-Minder威 feature for that seating position if it
is currently disabled. As confirmation, the safety belt warning light will
flash four times per second for three seconds, followed by three
seconds with the light off, then followed by the safety belt warning
light flashing four times per second for three seconds again.
134
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
AIRBAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
Important supplemental restraint system precautions
Airbags DO NOT inflate slowly or
gently and the risk of injury from a
deploying airbag is greatest close to
the trim covering the airbag module.
WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver,
should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.
WARNING: When possible, all children 12 years old and under
should be properly restrained in a rear seating position.
135
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
WARNING: National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) recommends a minimum distance of at least 10 inches
(25 cm) between an occupant’s chest and the driver airbag module.
WARNING: Never place your arm over the airbag module as a
deploying airbag can result in serious arm fractures or other
injuries.
Steps you can take to properly position yourself away from the airbag:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the
pedals comfortably.
• Recline the seat slightly (one or two degrees) from the upright
position.
WARNING: Do not put anything on or over the airbag module.
Placing objects on or over the airbag inflation area may cause
those objects to be propelled by the airbag into your face and torso
causing serious injury.
WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the
airbag supplemental restraint system (SRS) or its fuses. See your
authorized dealer.
WARNING: Modifying or adding equipment to the front end of
the vehicle (including frame, bumper, front end body structure
and tow hooks) may affect the performance of the airbag system,
increasing the risk of injury. Do not modify the front end of the
vehicle.
136
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Children and airbags
Children must always be properly
restrained. Accident statistics
suggest that children are safer when
properly restrained in the rear
seating positions than in the front
seating position. Failure to follow
these instructions may increase the
risk of injury in a collision.
WARNING: Airbags can kill
or injure a child in a child
seat. NEVER place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active
airbag. If you must use a
forward-facing child seat in the
front seat, move the seat all the
way back.
How does the safety belt pretensioner and airbag supplemental
restraint system work?
The safety belt pretensioner and
airbag SRS are designed to activate
when the vehicle sustains
longitudinal deceleration sufficient
to cause the sensors to close an
electrical circuit that initiates
pretensioner activation and airbag
inflation.
The fact that the pretensioners and
airbags did not activate in a collision
does not mean that something is
wrong with the system. Rather, it means the forces were not of the type
sufficient to cause activation. Front airbags are designed to activate in
frontal and near-frontal collisions, not rollover, side-impact, or
rear-impacts unless the collision causes sufficient longitudinal
deceleration.
137
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
The airbags inflate and deflate
rapidly upon activation. After airbag
deployment, it is normal to notice a
smoke-like, powdery residue or
smell the burnt propellant. This may
consist of cornstarch, talcum
powder (to lubricate the bag) or
sodium compounds (e.g., baking
soda) that result from the
combustion process that inflates the
airbag. Small amounts of sodium
hydroxide may be present which
may irritate the skin and eyes, but
none of the residue is toxic.
While the system is designed to help
reduce serious injuries, contact with
a deploying airbag may also cause abrasions, swelling or temporary
hearing loss. Because airbags must inflate rapidly and with considerable
force, there is the risk of death or serious injuries such as fractures,
facial and eye injuries or internal injuries, particularly to occupants who
are not properly restrained or are otherwise out of position at the time
of airbag deployment. Thus, it is extremely important that occupants be
properly restrained as far away from the airbag module as possible while
maintaining vehicle control.
WARNING: Several air bag system components get hot after
inflation. Do not touch them after inflation.
WARNING: If the air bag has deployed, the air bag will not
function again and must be replaced immediately. If the air
bag is not replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury
in a collision.
The SRS consists of:
• driver and passenger airbag modules (which include the inflators and
airbags)
• seat-mounted side airbags. Refer to Seat-mounted side airbag system
later in this chapter
• safety belt pretensioners
• one or more impact and safing sensors
138
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
• a readiness light and tone
• and the electrical wiring which connects the components
• Side curtain airbag system. Refer to Side curtain airbag system later
in this chapter.
• Front passenger sensing system. Refer to Front passenger sensing
system later in this chapter.
• “Passenger airbag off” or “pass airbag off” indicator lamp. Refer to
Front passenger sensing system later in this chapter.
The diagnostic module monitors its own internal circuits and the
supplemental airbag electrical system wiring (including the impact
sensors), the system wiring, the airbag system readiness light, the airbag
back up power, the airbag ignitors and safety belt pretensioners.
Front passenger sensing system
The front passenger sensing system is designed to meet the regulatory
requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) 208
and is designed to disable (will not inflate) the front passenger’s frontal
airbag under certain conditions.
The front passenger sensing system works with sensors that are part of
the front passenger’s seat and safety belt. The sensors are designed to
detect the presence of a properly seated occupant and determine if the
front passenger’s frontal airbag should be enabled (may inflate) or
disabled (will not inflate).
The front passenger sensing system will disable (will not inflate) the
front passenger’s frontal airbag if:
• the front passenger seat is unoccupied, or has small/medium objects in
the front seat.
• the system determines that an infant is present in a rear-facing infant
seat that is installed according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
• the system determines that a small child is present in a forward-facing
child restraint that is installed according to the manufacturer’s
instructions.
• the system determines that a small child is present in a booster seat.
• a front passenger takes his/her weight off of the seat for a period of
time.
139
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
The front passenger sensing system will turn off the passenger seat side
airbag if:
• the seat is empty and safety belt is unbuckled.
• a child or a small person occupies the front passenger seat and the
child or small person is unbuckled.
The front passenger sensing system
uses a ⬙passenger airbag off⬙ or
⬙pass airbag off⬙ indicator which will
illuminate and stay lit to remind you
that the front passenger frontal
airbag is disabled. The indicator
lamp is located in the center stack of the instrument panel above the
radio.
Note: The indicator lamp will illuminate for a short period of time when
the ignition is turned to the on position to confirm it is functional.
When the front passenger seat is not occupied (empty seat) or in the
event that the front passenger frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate), the
indicator lamp will be unlit.
The front passenger sensing system is designed to disable (will not
inflate) the front passenger’s frontal airbag when a rear facing infant
seat, a forward-facing child restraint, or a booster seat is detected.
• When the front passenger sensing system disables (will not inflate)
the front passenger frontal airbag, the indicator lamp will illuminate
and stay lit to remind you that the front passenger frontal airbag is
disabled.
• If the child restraint has been installed and the indicator lamp is not
lit, then turn the vehicle off, remove the child restraint from the
vehicle and reinstall the restraint following the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions.
The front passenger sensing system is designed to enable (may inflate)
the front passenger’s frontal airbag anytime the system senses that a
person of adult size is sitting properly in the front passenger seat.
• When the front passenger sensing system enables the front passenger
frontal airbag (may inflate), the indicator lamp will be unlit and stay
unlit.
140
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
If a person of adult size is sitting in the front passenger’s seat, but the
⬙passenger airbag off⬙ or ⬙pass airbag off⬙ indicator lamp is lit, it is
possible that the person isn’t sitting properly in the seat. If this happens:
• Turn the vehicle off and ask the person to place the seatback in the
full upright position.
• Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion,
with the person’s legs comfortably extended.
• Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in this position for
about two minutes. This will allow the system to detect that person
and enable the passenger’s frontal airbag.
• If the indicator lamp remains lit even after this, the person should be
advised to ride in the rear seat.
Occupant
Pass Airbag Off
Indicator Lamp
Unlit
Lit
Empty seat
Small child in child
safety seat or booster
Small child with safety Lit
belt buckled or
unbuckled
Adult
Unlit
Passenger Airbag
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
WARNING: Even with Advanced Restraints Systems, children
12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating
position.
After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on safety belts, it’s
very important that they continue to sit properly. A properly seated
occupant sits upright, leaning against the seat back, and centered on the
seat cushion, with their feet comfortably extended on the floor. Sitting
improperly can increase the chance of injury in a crash event. For
example, if an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward,
leans forward or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of
injury during a crash is greatly increased.
WARNING: Sitting improperly out of position or with the seat
back reclined too far can take off weight from the seat cushion
and affect the decision of the front passenger sensing system, resulting
in serious injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright against your seatback, with your feet on the floor.
141
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
The front passenger sensing system may detect small or medium objects
placed on the seat cushion. For most objects that are in the front
passenger seat, the passenger airbag will be disabled. Even though the
passenger airbag is disabled, the ⬙pass airbag off⬙ lamp may or may not
be illuminated according to the table below.
Objects
Pass Airbag Off
Indicator Lamp
Unlit
Small (i.e. three-ring
binder, small purse,
bottled water)
Medium (i.e. heavy
Lit
briefcase, fully packed
luggage)
Empty seat, or small
Lit
to medium object with
safety belt buckled
Passenger Airbag
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
If you think that the status of the passenger airbag off indicator lamp is
incorrect, check for the following:
• Objects lodged underneath the seat
• Objects between the seat cushion and the center console (if
equipped)
• Objects hanging off the seat back
• Objects stowed in the seatback map pocket (if equipped)
• Objects placed on the occupant’s lap
• Cargo interference with the seat
• Other passengers pushing or pulling on the seat
• Rear passenger feet and knees resting or pushing on the seat
The conditions listed above may cause the weight of a properly seated
occupant to be incorrectly interpreted by the front passenger sensing
system. The person in the front passenger seat may appear heavier or
lighter due to the conditions described in the list above.
142
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
WARNING: To reduce the risk of possible serious injury:
Do not stow objects in seat back map pocket (if equipped) or
hang objects off seat back if a child is in the front passenger seat.
Do not place objects underneath the front passenger seat or between
the seat and the center console (if equipped).
Check the “passenger airbag off” or “pass airbag off” indicator lamp for
proper airbag status.
Failure to follow these instructions may interfere with the front
passenger seat sensing system.
In case there is a problem with the
front passenger sensing system, the
airbag readiness light in the
instrument cluster will stay lit.
If the airbag readiness light is lit, do the following:
The driver and/or adult passengers should check for any objects that
may be lodged underneath the front passenger seat or cargo interfering
with the seat.
If objects are lodged and/or cargo is interfering with the seat; please take
the following steps to remove the obstruction:
• Pull the vehicle over.
• Turn the vehicle off.
• Driver and/or adult passengers should check for any objects lodged
underneath the front passenger seat or cargo interfering with the seat.
• Remove the obstruction(s) (if found).
• Restart the vehicle.
• Wait at least two minutes and verify that the airbag readiness light is
no longer illuminated
• If the airbag readiness light remains illuminated, this may or may/not
be a problem due to the front passenger sensing system.
DO NOT attempt to repair or service the system; take your vehicle
immediately to an authorized dealer.
If it is necessary to modify an advanced front airbag system to
accommodate a person with disabilities, contact the Ford Customer
Relationship Center at the phone number shown in the Customer
Assistance section of this Owner’s Guide.
143
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
WARNING: Any alteration/modification to the front passenger
seat may affect the performance of the front passenger sensing
system.
Determining if the system is operational
The supplemental restraint system uses a warning indicator light in the
instrument cluster or a back-up tone to indicate the condition of the
system. Refer to the Warning lights and chimes section in the
Instrument Cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the airbag is not
required.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following:
• The readiness light (same light
for front and side airbag system)
will either flash or stay lit.
• The readiness light will not
illuminate immediately after ignition is turned on.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and/or light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the supplemental
restraint system serviced at an authorized dealer immediately. Unless
serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a
collision.
Seat-mounted side airbag system
WARNING: Do not place objects or mount equipment on or
near the airbag cover on the side of the seatbacks of the front
seats or in front seat areas that may come into contact with a
deploying airbag. Failure to follow these instructions may increase the
risk of personal injury in the event of a collision.
WARNING: Do not use accessory seat covers. The use of
accessory seat covers may prevent the deployment of the side
airbags and increase the risk of injury in an accident.
WARNING: Do not lean your head on the door. The side airbag
could injure you as it deploys from the side of the seatback.
144
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the
airbag SRS, its fuses or the seat cover on a seat containing an
airbag. See your authorized dealer.
WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle should always wear
their safety belts even when an airbag SRS is provided.
How does the side airbag system work?
The design and development of the side airbag system included
recommended testing procedures that were developed by a group of
automotive safety experts known as the Side Airbag Technical Working
Group. These recommended testing procedures help reduce the risk of
injuries related to the deployment of side airbags (including side air
curtain systems).
The side airbag system consists of
the following:
• An inflatable nylon bag (airbag)
with a gas generator concealed
behind the outboard bolster of
the driver and front passenger
seatbacks.
• The same warning light,
electronic control and diagnostic
unit as used for the front airbags.
• Two crash sensors located under the outboard side of the front seats,
attached near the floor.
Side airbags, in combination with safety belts, can help reduce the risk of
severe injuries in the event of a significant side impact collision.
The side airbags are fitted on the outboard side of the seatbacks of the
front seats. In certain lateral collisions, the airbag on the side affected by
the collision will be inflated. If the front passenger sensing system
detects an empty seat or an unbuckled child or small person, the front
passenger seat-mounted side airbag will be deactivated. The airbag was
designed to inflate between the door panel and occupant to further
enhance the protection provided occupants in side impact collisions.
The airbag SRS is designed to activate when the vehicle sustains lateral
deceleration sufficient to cause the sensors to close an electrical circuit
that initiates airbag inflation.
145
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
The fact that the airbags did not inflate in a collision does not mean that
something is wrong with the system. Rather, it means the forces were
not of the type sufficient to cause activation. Side airbags are designed
to inflate in side-impact collisions, not roll-over, rear-impact, frontal or
near-frontal collisions, unless the collision causes sufficient lateral
deceleration.
WARNING: Several air bag system components get hot after
inflation. Do not touch them after inflation.
WARNING: If the side
airbag has deployed, the
airbag will not function again.
The side airbag system
(including the seat) must be
inspected and serviced by an
authorized dealer. If the airbag
is not replaced, the unrepaired
area will increase the risk of injury
in a collision.
Determining if the system is operational
The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to
indicate the condition of the system. Refer to the Airbag readiness
section in the Instrument Cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the
airbag is not required.
Any difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the
following:
• The readiness light (same light as used for front airbag system) will
either flash or stay lit.
• The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is
turned to the on position.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the SRS serviced
at an authorized dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the system may not
function properly in the event of a collision.
146
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Side curtain airbag system
WARNING: Do not place
objects or mount equipment
on or near the headliner at the
siderail that may come into
contact with a deploying side air
curtain. Failure to follow these
instructions may increase the risk
of personal injury in the event of a
collision.
WARNING: Do not place objects or mount equipment on or
near the side air curtain cover.
WARNING: Do not lean your head on the door. The side airbag
could injure you as it deploys from the seat.
WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the side
air curtain system, its fuses, the A, B, or C pillar trim, or the
headliner on a vehicle containing a side air curtain. See your
authorized dealer.
WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver,
should always wear their safety belts even when an inflatable
curtain is provided.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of injury, do not obstruct or
place objects in the deployment zone of the inflatable curtain.
147
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
How does the side air curtain system work?
The design and development of the
side air curtain system included
recommended testing procedures
that were developed by a group of
automotive safety experts known as
the Side Airbag Technical Working
Group. These recommended testing
procedures help reduce the risk of
injuries related to the deployment of
side airbags (including side air
curtain systems).
The side air curtain system consists
of the following:
• An inflatable nylon curtain with a
gas generator concealed behind
the headliner and above the
doors.
• The headliner will flex to open
above the side doors to allow air curtain deployment.
• The same warning light, electronic control and diagnostic unit as used
for the front airbags.
• Two crash sensors located under the outboard side of the front seats,
attached near the floor.
• Two crash sensors located at the base of the “C” pillars above the
wheel house.
Side air curtains and side airbags, in combination with safety belts, can
help reduce the risk of severe injuries in the event of a significant side
impact collision.
Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in
the rear seats. The side air curtain will not interfere with children
restrained using a properly installed child or booster seat because it is
designed to inflate downward from the headliner above the doors along
the side window openings.
The side air curtains are mounted to the sheet metal above the first and
second row seats. In certain lateral collisions, the air curtain and
seat-mounted side airbag on the side affected by the collision will be
inflated, except that the passenger sensing system will deactivate the
passenger seat-mounted side airbag if it detects an empty unbuckled
passenger seat or an unbuckled child or small person in the passenger
148
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
seat. The air curtain was designed to inflate between the side window
area and occupant to further enhance the head protection provided to
occupants in side impact collisions. The seat-mounted side airbag was
designed to inflate between the door panel and occupant to further
enhance the protection provided occupants in side impact collisions.
The side air curtain system SRS is designed to activate when the vehicle
sustains lateral deceleration sufficient to cause the sensors to close an
electrical circuit that initiates air curtain and seat-mounted side airbag
inflation.
The fact that the side air curtain and seat-mounted side airbag did not
inflate in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with the
system. Rather, it means the forces were not of the type sufficient to
cause activation. The side air curtain system is designed to inflate in side
impact collisions, not roll-over, rear impact, frontal or near-frontal
collisions, unless the collision causes sufficient lateral deceleration.
WARNING: Several air bag system components get hot after
inflation. Do not touch them after inflation.
WARNING: If the side air
curtain has deployed, the
air curtain will not function
again. The side air curtain
system (including the A, B and
C pillar trim and headliner)
must be inspected and serviced
by an authorized dealer. If the
air curtain is not replaced, the
unrepaired area will increase the
risk of injury in a collision.
Determining if the system is operational
The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to
indicate the condition of the system. Refer to the Airbag readiness
section in the Instrument Cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the
airbag is not required.
Any difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the
following:
• The readiness light (same light as used for front airbag system) will
either flash or stay lit.
149
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
• The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is
turned to the on position.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the SRS serviced
at an authorized dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the system may not
function properly in the event of a collision.
Disposal of airbags and airbag equipped vehicles
(including pretensioners)
See your authorized dealer. Airbags MUST BE disposed of by qualified
personnel.
SAFETY RESTRAINTS FOR CHILDREN
See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety
restraints for children. Also see Airbag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) in this chapter for special instructions about using airbags.
Important child restraint precautions
WARNING: Always make sure your child is secured properly in
a device that is appropriate for their height, age and weight.
Child safety restraints must be purchased separately from the vehicle.
Failure to follow these instructions and guidelines may result in an
increased risk of serious injury or death to your child.
WARNING: All children are shaped differently. The
Recommendations for Safety Restraints are based on probable
child height, age and weight thresholds from NHTSA and other safety
organizations or are the minimum requirements of law. Ford
recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician (CPST) and your pediatrician to make sure your child seat
is appropriate for your child, and is compatible with and properly
installed in the vehicle. To locate a child seat fitting station and CPST
contact the NHTSA toll free at 1-888-327-4236 or on the internet at
http://www.nhtsa.dot.gov. Failure to properly restrain children in safety
seats made especially for their height, age, and weight may result in an
increased risk of serious injury or death to your child.
150
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children
Recommended
Child size, height, weight, or age
restraint type
Infants Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or
Use a child safety
or
less (generally age four or younger)
seat (sometimes
toddlers
called an infant
carrier, convertible
seat, or toddler seat).
Small
Children who have outgrown or no
Use a belt-positioning
booster seat.
children longer properly fit in a child safety
seat (generally children who are less
than 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters)
tall, are greater than age four (4) and
less than age twelve (12), and
between 40 lbs (18 kg) and 80 lbs
(36 kg) and upward to 100 lbs
(45 kg) if recommended by your
child restraint manufacturer)
Use a vehicle safety
Larger
Children who have outgrown or no
children longer properly fit in a
belt having the lap
belt snug and low
belt-positioning booster seat
across the hips,
(generally children who are at least
shoulder belt
4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall or
centered across the
greater than 80 lb (36 kg) or 100 lb
shoulder and chest,
(45 kg) if recommended by child
and seatback upright.
restraint manufacturer)
• You are required by law to properly use safety seats for infants and
toddlers in the U.S. and Canada.
• Many states and provinces require that small children use approved
booster seats until they reach age eight, a height of 4 ft 9 in
(1.45 meters) tall, or 80 lb (36 kg). Check your local and state or
provincial laws for specific requirements regarding the safety of
children in your vehicle.
• When possible, always properly restrain children twelve (12) years of
age and under in a rear seating position of your vehicle. Accident
statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seating positions than in a front seating position.
151
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children
Restraint
Type
Rear
facing
child seat
Forward
facing
child seat
Forward
facing
child seat
Use any attachment method as indicated
below by “X”
LATCH LATCH Safety Safety belt Safety
(lower (lower belt
and LATCH belt
Child
anchors anchors and
(lower
only
Weight
and
only)
top
anchors
top
tether and top
tether
anchor tether
anchor)
anchor)
Up to
48 lb
X
X
(21 kg)
Up to
48 lb
X
X
X
(21 kg)
Over
48 lb
X
X
(21 kg)
WARNING: Air bags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
NEVER place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active air
bag. If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move
the vehicle seat all the way back. When possible, all children age 12
and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position. If
all children cannot be seated and restrained properly in a rear seating
position, properly restrain the largest child in the front seat.
WARNING: Always carefully follow the instructions and
warnings provided by the manufacturer of any child restraint to
determine if the restraint device is appropriate for your child’s size,
height, weight, or age. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions and warnings provided for installation and use in
conjunction with the instructions and warnings provided by the vehicle
manufacturer. A safety seat that is improperly installed or utilized, is
inappropriate for your child’s height, age, or weight or does not
properly fit the child may increase the risk of serious injury or death.
152
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
WARNING: Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap
while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the
child from injury in a collision, which may result in serious injury or
death.
WARNING: Never use pillows, books, or towels to boost a child.
They can slide around and increase the likelihood of injury or
death in a collision.
WARNING: Always restrain an unoccupied child seat or booster
seat. These objects may become projectiles in a collision or
sudden stop, which may increase the risk of serious injury.
WARNING: Never place, or allow a child to place, the shoulder
belt under a child’s arm or behind the back because it reduces
the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk
of injury or death in a collision.
WARNING: Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or pets
unattended in your vehicle.
Transporting children
Always make sure your child is secured properly in a device that is
appropriate for their age, height and weight. All children are shaped
differently. The child height, age and weight thresholds provided are
recommendations or the minimum requirements of law. The National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) provides education and
training to ensure that all children ages 0 to 16 are properly restrained in
the correct restraint system. Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician (CPST) and your
pediatrician to make sure your seat is appropriate for your child and
properly installed in the vehicle. To locate a child seat fitting station and
CPST contact the NHTSA toll free at 1-888-327-4236 or on the internet
at http://www.nhtsa.dot.gov.
Follow all the safety restraint and airbag precautions that apply to adult
passengers in your vehicle.
If the child is the proper height, age, and weight (as specified by your
child safety seat or booster manufacturer), fits the restraint and can be
153
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
restrained properly, then restrain the child in the child safety seat or
with the belt-positioning booster. Remember that child seats and
belt-positioning boosters vary and may be designed to fit children of
different heights, ages and weights. Children who are too large for child
safety seats or belt-positioning boosters (as specified by your child safety
seat manufacturer) should always properly wear safety belts.
SAFETY SEATS FOR CHILDREN
Infant and/or toddler seats
Use a safety seat that is recommended for the size and weight of the
child.
When installing a child safety seat:
• Review and follow the information
presented in the Airbag
supplemental restraint system
(SRS) section in this chapter.
• Carefully follow all of the
manufacturer’s instructions
included with the safety seat you
put in your vehicle. If you do not
install and use the safety seat
properly, the child may be injured
in a sudden stop or collision.
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. NEVER place a
rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag. If you must use a
forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the vehicle seat all the
way back.
Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating
position whenever possible. If all children cannot be seated and
restrained properly in a rear seating position, properly restrain the
largest child in the front seat.
Installing child safety seats with combination lap and shoulder
belts
Check to make sure the child seat is properly secured before each use.
Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating
position whenever possible. If all children cannot be seated and
restrained properly in a rear seating position, properly restrain the
largest child in the front seat.
154
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
When installing a child safety seat with combination lap/shoulder belts:
• Use the correct safety belt buckle for that seating position.
• Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle until you hear a snap
and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the
buckle.
• Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safety
seat, with the tongue between the child seat and the release button,
to help prevent accidental unbuckling.
• Place vehicle seat back in upright position.
• Put the safety belt in the automatic locking mode. Refer to step 5
below.
Perform the following steps when installing the child seat with
combination lap/shoulder belts:
Note: Although the child seat illustrated is a forward facing child seat,
the steps are the same for installing a rear facing child seat.
1. Position the child safety seat in a
seat with a combination lap and
shoulder belt.
2. Pull down on the shoulder belt
and then grasp the shoulder belt
and lap belt together.
155
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
3. While holding the shoulder and
lap belt portions together, route the
tongue through the child seat
according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions. Be sure
the belt webbing is not twisted.
4. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) for that seating position until
you hear a snap and feel the latch
engage. Make sure the tongue is
latched securely by pulling on it.
5. To put the retractor in the
automatic locking mode, grasp the
shoulder portion of the belt and pull
downward until all of the belt is
pulled out.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove slack. The belt will click as it
retracts to indicate it is in the automatic locking mode.
7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is
in the automatic locking mode (you should not be able to pull more belt
out). If the retractor is not locked, repeat Steps 5 and 6.
156
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
8. Remove remaining slack from the
belt. Force the seat down with extra
weight, e.g., by pressing down or
kneeling on the child restraint while
pulling up on the shoulder belt in
order to force slack from the belt.
This is necessary to remove the
remaining slack that will exist once
the additional weight of the child is
added to the child restraint. It also
helps to achieve the proper
snugness of the child seat to the vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean
towards the buckle will additionally help to remove remaining slack from
the belt.
9. Attach the tether strap (if the
child seat is equipped). Refer to
Attaching child safety seats with
tether straps later in this chapter.
10. Before placing the child in the
seat, forcibly move the seat forward
and back to make sure the seat is
securely held in place. To check
this, grab the seat at the belt path
and attempt to move it side to side
and forward and back. There should
be no more than one inch (2.5 cm) of movement for proper installation.
11. Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger
Safety Technician (CPST) to make certain the child restraint is properly
installed.
Attaching child safety seats with LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) attachments
The LATCH system is composed of three vehicle anchor points: two (2)
lower anchors located where the vehicle seat back and seat cushion meet
(called the “seat bight”) and one (1) top tether anchor located behind
that seating position.
LATCH compatible child safety seats have two rigid or webbing mounted
attachments that connect to the two lower anchors at the LATCH
equipped seating positions in your vehicle. This type of attachment
method eliminates the need to use safety belts to attach the child seat,
however the safety belt can still be used to attach the child seat. For
157
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
forward-facing child seats, the top tether strap must also be attached to
the proper top tether anchor, if a top tether strap has been provided
with your child seat. Ford Motor Company recommends the use of a
child safety seat having a top tether strap. See Attaching child safety
seats with tether straps and Recommendations for attaching safety
restraints for children in this chapter for more information.
Your vehicle has LATCH lower
anchors for child seat installation at
the seating positions marked with
the child seat symbol.
The LATCH anchors are located at
the rear section of the rear seat
between the cushion and seat back,
below the locator symbols on the
seat back. Follow the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions to
properly install a child seat with
LATCH attachments.
Follow the instructions on attaching child safety seats with tether straps.
Refer to Attaching child safety seats with tether straps later in this
chapter.
Attach LATCH lower attachments of the child seat only to the anchors
shown.
WARNING: Never attach two child safety seats to the same
anchor. In a crash, one anchor may not be strong enough to hold
two child safety seat attachments and may break, causing serious
injury or death.
158
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Use of inboard lower anchors from the outboard seating positions
(center seating use)
The lower anchors at the center of the second row rear seat are spaced
460 mm (18 inches) apart. The standardized spacing for LATCH lower
anchors is 280 mm (11 inches) center to center. A child seat with rigid
LATCH attachments cannot be installed at the center seating position.
LATCH compatible child seats (with attachments on belt webbing) can
only be used at this seating position provided that the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions permit use with the anchor spacing stated.
Do not attach a child seat to any lower anchor if an adjacent child seat is
attached to that anchor.
WARNING: The standardized spacing for LATCH lower anchors
is 280 mm (11 inches) center to center. Do not use LATCH
lower anchors for the center seating position unless the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions permit and specify using anchors spaced at
least as far apart as those in this vehicle.
If you install a child seat with rigid LATCH attachments, and have
attached the top tether strap to the proper top tether anchor, do not
tighten the tether strap enough to lift the child seat off the vehicle seat
cushion when the child is seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug
without lifting the front of the child seat. Keeping the child seat just
touching the vehicle seat gives the best protection in a severe crash.
Each time you use the safety seat, check that the seat is properly
attached to the lower anchors and tether anchor, if applicable. Tug the
child seat from side to side and forward and back where it is secured to
the vehicle. The seat should move less than one inch when you do this
for a proper installation.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being
injured in a crash greatly increases.
Combining safety belt and LATCH lower anchors for attaching
child safety seats
When used in combination, either the safety belt or the LATCH lower
anchors may be attached first, provided a proper installation is achieved.
Attach the tether strap afterward, if included with the child seat. Refer
to Recommendations for attaching safety restraints for children in
this chapter.
159
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Attaching child safety seats with tether straps
Many forward-facing child safety seats include a tether strap which
extends from the back of the child safety seat and hooks to an anchoring
point called the top tether anchor. Tether straps are available as an
accessory for many older safety seats. Contact the manufacturer of your
child seat for information about ordering a tether strap, or to obtain a
longer tether strap if the tether strap on your safety seat does not reach
the appropriate top tether anchor in the vehicle.
The rear seats of your vehicle are equipped with built-in tether strap
anchors located behind the seats as described below.
The tether anchors in your vehicle are located under a cover marked
with the tether anchor symbol (shown with title).
The tether strap anchors in your
vehicle are in the following positions
(shown from top view):
Attach the tether strap only to the appropriate tether anchor as shown.
The tether strap may not work properly if attached somewhere other
than the correct tether anchor.
Once the child safety seat has been installed, using either the safety belt,
the lower anchors of the LATCH system, or both, you can attach the top
tether strap.
Perform the following steps to attach a child safety seat to the tether
anchor:
1. Route the child safety seat tether strap over the back of the seat.
For vehicles with adjustable head restraints, route the tether strap under
the head restraint and between the head restraint posts, otherwise route
the tether strap over the top of the seatback.
2. Locate the correct anchor for the
selected seating position.
160
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
3. Open the tether anchor cover.
4. Clip the tether strap to the
anchor as shown.
If the tether strap is clipped
incorrectly, the child safety seat may
not be retained properly in the
event of a collision.
5. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being
injured in a collision greatly increases.
Child booster seats
The belt-positioning booster (booster seat) is used to improve the fit of
the vehicle safety belt. Children outgrow a typical child seat (e.g,
convertible or toddler seat) when they weigh about 40 lb (18 kg) and are
around four (4) years of age. Consult your child safety seat owner guide
for the weight, height, and age limits specific to your child safety seat.
Keep your child in the child safety seat if it properly fits the child,
remains appropriate for their weight, height and age AND if properly
secured to the vehicle.
Although the lap/shoulder belt will provide some protection, children
who have outgrown a typical child seat are still too small for lap/shoulder
belts to fit properly, and wearing an improperly fitted vehicle safety belt
could increase the risk of serious injury in a crash. To improve the fit of
both the lap and shoulder belt on children who have outgrown child
safety seats, Ford Motor Company recommends use of a belt-positioning
booster.
161
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Booster seats position a child so that vehicle lap/shoulder safety belts fit
better. They lift the child up so that the lap belt rests low across the hips
and the knees bend comfortably at the edge of the cushion, while
minimizing slouching. Booster seats may also make the shoulder belt fit
better and more comfortably. Try to keep the belt near the middle of the
shoulder and across the center of the chest. Moving the child closer (a
few centimeters or inches) to the center of the vehicle, but remaining in
the same seating position, may help provide a good shoulder belt fit.
When children should use booster seats
Children need to use booster seats from the time they outgrow the
toddler seat until they are big enough for the vehicle seat and
lap/shoulder belt to fit properly. Generally this is when they reach a
height of at least 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall (around age eight to
age twelve and between 40 lb (18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) or upward to
100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by your child restraint manufacturer).
Many state and provincial laws require that children use approved
booster seats until they reach age eight, a height of 4 feet 9 inches
(1.45 meters) tall, or 80 lb (36 kg).
Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these
questions when seated without a booster seat:
• Can the child sit all the way back
against the vehicle seat back with
knees bent comfortably at the
edge of the seat cushion?
• Can the child sit without
slouching?
• Does the lap belt rest low across the hips?
• Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest?
• Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
162
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Types of booster seats
There are generally two types of belt-positioning booster seats: backless
and high back. Always use booster seats in conjunction with the vehicle
lap/shoulder belt.
• Backless booster seats
If your backless booster seat has a
removable shield, remove the
shield. If a vehicle seating position
has a low seat back or no head
restraint, a backless booster seat
may place your child’s head (as
measured at the tops of the ears)
above the top of the seat. In this
case, move the backless booster
to another seating position with a
higher seat back or head restraint and lap/shoulder belts, or consider
using a high back booster seat.
• High back booster seats
If, with a backless booster seat,
you cannot find a seating position
that adequately supports your
child’s head, a high back booster
seat would be a better choice.
163
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Children and booster seats vary in size and shape. Choose a booster that
keeps the lap belt low and snug across the hips, never up across the
stomach, and lets you adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest and
rest snugly near the center of the shoulder. The drawings below compare
the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder belt uncomfortably close to the neck
and a shoulder belt that could slip off the shoulder. The drawings below
also show how the lap belt should be low and snug across the child’s
hips.
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat, placing a rubberized mesh
sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve this
condition. Do not introduce any item thicker than this under the booster
seat. Check with the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions.
The importance of shoulder belts
Using a booster without a shoulder belt increases the risk of a child’s
head hitting a hard surface in a collision. For this reason, you should
never use a booster seat with a lap belt only. It is generally best to use a
booster seat with lap/shoulder belts in the back seat.
164
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Move a child to a different seating location if the shoulder belt does not
stay positioned on the shoulder during use.
Follow all instructions provided by the manufacturer of the booster seat.
WARNING: Never place, or allow a child to place, the shoulder
belt under a child’s arm or behind the back because it reduces
the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk
of injury or death in a collision.
Child restraint and safety belt maintenance
Inspect the vehicle safety belts and child safety seat systems periodically
to make sure they work properly and are not damaged. Inspect the
vehicle and child seat safety belts to make sure there are no nicks, tears
or cuts. Replace if necessary. All vehicle safety belt assemblies, including
retractors, buckles, front safety belt buckle assemblies, buckle support
assemblies (slide bar-if equipped), shoulder belt height adjusters (if
equipped), shoulder belt guide on seatback (if equipped), child safety
seat LATCH and tether anchors, and attaching hardware, should be
inspected after a collision. Refer to the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for additional inspection and maintenance information
specific to the child restraint. Ford Motor Company recommends that all
safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles involved in a collision be
replaced. However, if the collision was minor and an authorized dealer
finds that the belts do not show damage and continue to operate
properly, they do not need to be replaced. Safety belt assemblies not in
use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either
damage or improper operation is noted.
For proper care of soiled safety belts, refer to Interior in the Cleaning
chapter.
WARNING: Failure to inspect and if necessary replace the
safety belt assembly or child restraint system under the above
conditions could result in severe personal injuries in the event of a
collision.
165
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
INFORMATION ABOUT UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires. The
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For
example:
• Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United
States Department of Transportation has set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires. They do
not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saver or
temporary use spare tires, light truck or “LT” type tires, tires with
nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as
defined in Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104(c)(2).
U.S. Department of Transportation-Tire quality grades: The U.S.
Department of Transportation requires Ford Motor Company to give you
the following information about tire grades exactly as the government
has written it.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half (11⁄2) times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual
conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction AA A B C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The
grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
166
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
WARNING: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature A B C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 139. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by
law.
WARNING: The temperature grade for this tire is established
for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
TIRES
Tires are designed to give many thousands of miles of service, but they
must be maintained in order to get the maximum benefit from them.
Glossary of tire terminology
• Tire label: A label showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire sizes,
recommended inflation pressure and the maximum weight the vehicle
can carry.
• Tire Identification Number (TIN): A number on the sidewall of
each tire providing information about the tire brand and
manufacturing plant, tire size and date of manufacture. Also referred
to as DOT code.
• Inflation pressure: A measure of the amount of air in a tire.
• Standard load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a
maximum load at 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric tires]. Increasing
the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire’s
load carrying capability.
• Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a
heavier maximum load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metric tires].
167
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase
the tire’s load carrying capability.
• kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pressure.
• PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard unit of air pressure.
• Cold inflation pressure: The tire pressure when the vehicle has
been stationary and out of direct sunlight for an hour or more and
prior to the vehicle being driven for 1 mile (1.6 km).
• Recommended inflation pressure: The cold inflation pressure found
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label located on
the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door.
• B-pillar: The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the
front door.
• Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next to the rim.
• Sidewall of the tire: Area between the bead area and the tread.
• Tread area of the tire: Area of the perimeter of the tire that
contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle.
• Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or a tire and tube assembly
upon which the tire beads are seated.
INFLATING YOUR TIRES
Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your tires are properly
inflated. Remember that a tire can lose up to half of its air pressure
without appearing flat.
Every day before you drive, check your tires. If one looks lower than the
others, use a tire gauge to check pressure of all tires and adjust if
required.
At least once a month and before long trips, inspect each tire and check
the tire pressure with a tire gauge (including spare, if equipped). Inflate
all tires to the inflation pressure recommended by Ford Motor Company.
You are strongly urged to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge, as automatic
service station gauges may be inaccurate. Ford recommends the use of a
digital or dial-type tire pressure gauge rather than a stick-type tire
pressure gauge.
Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire
performance and wear. Under-inflation or over-inflation may cause
uneven treadwear patterns.
168
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
WARNING: Under-inflation is the most common cause of tire
failures and may result in severe tire cracking, tread separation
or ⬙blowout⬙, with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk
of injury. Under-inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling
resistance, resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the tire. It
also may result in unnecessary tire stress, irregular wear, loss of
vehicle control and accidents. A tire can lose up to half of its air
pressure and not appear to be flat!
Always inflate your tires to the Ford recommended inflation pressure
even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found
on the tire. The Ford recommended tire inflation pressure is found on
the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label which is located
on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. Failure to follow the tire
pressure recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns and
adversely affect the way your vehicle handles.
Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure is the tire manufacturer’s
maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at which the
maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is normally
higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation pressure
which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire
Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door.
The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the
recommended pressure on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or
Tire Label.
When weather temperature changes occur, tire inflation pressures also
change. A 10°F (6°C) temperature drop can cause a corresponding drop
of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check your tire pressures
frequently and adjust them to the proper pressure which can be found
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label.
To check the pressure in your tire(s):
1. Make sure the tires are cool, meaning they are not hot from driving
even a mile.
If you are checking tire pressure when the tire is hot, (i.e. driven more
than 1 mile [1.6 km]), never “bleed” or reduce air pressure. The tires are
hot from driving and it is normal for pressures to increase above
recommended cold pressures. A hot tire at or below recommended cold
inflation pressure could be significantly under-inflated.
169
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Note: If you have to drive a distance to get air for your tire(s), check
and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure
when you get to the pump. It is normal for tires to heat up and the air
pressure inside to go up as you drive.
2. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire, then firmly press the tire
gauge onto the valve and measure the pressure.
3. Add enough air to reach the recommended air pressure.
Note: If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the metal stem in
the center of the valve. Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge.
4. Replace the valve cap.
5. Repeat this procedure for each tire, including the spare.
Note: Some spare tires operate at a higher inflation pressure than the
other tires. For T-type/mini-spare tires (see the Dissimilar spare
tire/wheel information section for description): Store and maintain at
60 psi (4.15 bar). For Full Size and Dissimilar spare tires (see the
Dissimilar spare tire/wheel information section for description): Store
and maintain at the higher of the front and rear inflation pressure as
shown on the Tire Label.
6. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other
objects embedded that could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air
leak.
7. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges, cuts or bulges.
TIRE CARE
Inspecting your tires
Periodically inspect the tire treads for uneven or excessive wear and
remove objects such as stones, nails or glass that may be wedged in the
tread grooves. Check for holes or cuts that may permit air leakage from
the tire and make necessary repairs. Also inspect the tire sidewalls for
cracking, cuts, bruises and other signs of damage or excessive wear. If
internal damage to the tire is suspected, have the tire demounted and
inspected in case it needs to be repaired or replaced. For your safety,
tires that are damaged or show signs of excessive wear should not be
used because they are more likely to blow out or fail.
170
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can cause tires to wear
abnormally. Inspect all your tires, including the spare, frequently, and
replace them if one or more of the following conditions exist:
Tire wear
When the tread is worn down to
1/16th of an inch (2 mm), tires must
be replaced to help prevent your
vehicle from skidding and
hydroplaning. Built-in treadwear
indicators, or “wear bars”, which
look like narrow strips of smooth
rubber across the tread will appear
on the tire when the tread is worn
down to 1/16th of an inch (2 mm).
When the tire tread wears down to
the same height as these “wear bars”, the tire is worn out and must be
replaced.
Damage
Periodically inspect the tire treads and sidewalls for damage (such as
bulges in the tread or sidewalls, cracks in the tread groove and
separation in the tread or sidewall). If damage is observed or suspected
have the tire inspected by a tire professional. Tires can be damaged
during off-road use, so inspection after off-road use is also
recommended.
WARNING: Age
Tires degrade over time depending on many factors such as
weather, storage conditions, and conditions of use (load, speed,
inflation pressure, etc.) the tires experience throughout their lives.
In general, tires should be replaced after six years regardless of tread
wear. However, heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading
conditions can accelerate the aging process and may require tires to be
replaced more frequently.
You should replace your spare tire when you replace the road tires or
after six years due to aging even if it has not been used.
171
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Both U.S. and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to
place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of
the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for
safety standard certification and in case of a recall.
This begins with the letters “DOT” and indicates that the tire meets all
federal standards. The next two numbers or letters are the plant code
designating where it was manufactured, the next two are the tire size
code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was
built. For example, the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After
2000 the numbers go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th
week of 2001. The numbers in between are identification codes used for
traceability. This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect
requires a recall.
Tire replacement requirements
Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide a safe ride and
handling capability.
WARNING: Only use replacement tires and wheels that are the
same size, load index, speed rating and type (such as P-metric
versus LT-metric or all-season versus all-terrain) as those originally
provided by Ford. The recommended tire and wheel size may be found
on either the Safety Compliance Certification Label or the Tire Label
which is located on the B-Pillar or edge of the driver’s door. If this
information is not found on these labels then you should consult your
Ford dealer. Use of any tire or wheel not recommended by Ford can
affect the safety and performance of your vehicle, which could result in
an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death. Additionally the use of non-recommended tires and
wheels could cause steering, suspension, axle or transfer case/power
transfer unit failure. If you have questions regarding tire replacement,
see an authorized dealer.
172
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
WARNING: When mounting replacement tires and wheels, you
should not exceed the maximum pressure indicated on the
sidewall of the tire to set the beads without additional precautions
listed below. If the beads do not seat at the maximum pressure
indicated, re-lubricate and try again.
When inflating the tire for mounting pressures up to 20 psi (1.38 bar)
greater than the maximum pressure on the tire sidewall, the following
precautions must be taken to protect the person mounting the tire:
1. Make sure that you have the correct tire and wheel size.
2. Lubricate the tire bead and wheel bead seat area again.
3. Stand at a minimum of 12 ft. (3.66 m) away from the tire wheel
assembly.
4. Use both eye and ear protection.
For a mounting pressure more than 20 psi (1.38 bar) greater than the
maximum pressure, a Ford Dealer or other tire service professional
should do the mounting.
Always inflate steel carcass tires with a remote air fill with the person
inflating standing at a minimum of 12 ft. (3.66 m) away from the tire
wheel assembly.
Important: Remember to replace the wheel valve stems when the road
tires are replaced on your vehicle.
It is recommended that the two front tires or two rear tires generally be
replaced as a pair.
The tire pressure sensors mounted in the wheels (originally installed on
your vehicle) are not designed to be used in aftermarket wheels.
The use of wheels or tires not recommended by Ford Motor Company
may affect the operation of your Tire Pressure Monitoring System.
If the TPMS indicator is flashing, your TPMS is malfunctioning. Your
replacement tire might be incompatible with your TPMS, or some
component of the TPMS may be damaged.
Safety practices
Driving habits have a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety.
• Observe posted speed limits
• Avoid fast starts, stops and turns
• Avoid potholes and objects on the road
173
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
• Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against a curb when parking
WARNING: If your vehicle is stuck in snow, mud, sand, etc., do
not rapidly spin the tires; spinning the tires can tear the tire and
cause an explosion. A tire can explode in as little as three to five
seconds.
WARNING: Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h).
The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
Highway hazards
No matter how carefully you drive there’s always the possibility that you
may eventually have a flat tire on the highway. Drive slowly to the
closest safe area out of traffic. This may further damage the flat tire, but
your safety is more important.
If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving, or you
suspect your tire or vehicle has been damaged, immediately reduce your
speed. Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road. Stop and
inspect the tires for damage. If a tire is under-inflated or damaged,
deflate it, remove wheel and replace it with your spare tire and wheel. If
you cannot detect a cause, have the vehicle towed to the nearest repair
facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected.
Tire and wheel alignment
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole can cause the front end of your
vehicle to become misaligned or cause damage to your tires. If your
vehicle seems to pull to one side when you’re driving, the wheels may be
out of alignment. Have an authorized dealer check the wheel alignment
periodically.
Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear can cause uneven and rapid
treadwear of your tires and should be corrected by an authorized dealer.
Front wheel drive (FWD) vehicles and those with an independent rear
suspension (if equipped) may require alignment of all four wheels.
The tires should also be balanced periodically. An unbalanced tire and
wheel assembly may result in irregular tire wear.
Tire rotation
Rotating your tires at the recommended interval (as indicated in the
scheduled maintenance information that comes with your vehicle) will
help your tires wear more evenly, providing better tire performance and
longer tire life.
174
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
• Front Wheel Drive (FWD)/All
Wheel Drive (AWD) vehicles
(front tires at top of diagram)
Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires.
Note: If your tires show uneven wear ask an authorized dealer to check
for and correct any wheel misalignment, tire imbalance or mechanical
problem involved before tire rotation.
Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire/wheel. A
dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that is
different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels. If
you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel it is intended for temporary use
only and should not be used in a tire rotation.
Note: After having your tires rotated, inflation pressure must be checked
and adjusted to the vehicle requirements.
INFORMATION CONTAINED ON THE TIRE SIDEWALL
Both U.S. and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to
place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of
the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for
safety standard certification and in case of a recall.
175
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Information on “P” type tires
P215/65R15 95H is an example of a
tire size, load index and speed
rating. The definitions of these
items are listed below. (Note that
the tire size, load index and speed
rating for your vehicle may be
different from this example.)
1. P: Indicates a tire, designated by
the Tire and Rim Association
(T&RA), that may be used for
service on cars, SUVs, minivans and
light trucks.
Note: If your tire size does not
begin with a letter this may mean it
is designated by either ETRTO
(European Tire and Rim Technical Organization) or JATMA (Japan Tire
Manufacturing Association).
2. 215: Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from
sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the
wider the tire.
3. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to
width.
4. R: Indicates a “radial” type tire.
5. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
6. 95: Indicates the tire’s load index. It is an index that relates to how
much weight a tire can carry. You may find this information in your
Owner’s Guide. If not, contact a local tire dealer.
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
required by federal law.
7. H: Indicates the tire’s speed rating. The speed rating denotes the
speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of
time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure. The tires
on your vehicle may operate at different conditions for load and inflation
pressure. These speed ratings may need to be adjusted for the difference
in conditions. The ratings range from 81 mph (130 km/h) to 186 mph
(299 km/h). These ratings are listed in the following chart.
176
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
required by federal law.
Letter rating
Speed rating - mph (km/h)
M
81 mph (130 km/h)
N
87 mph (140 km/h)
Q
99 mph (159 km/h)
R
106 mph (171 km/h)
S
112 mph (180 km/h)
T
118 mph (190 km/h)
U
124 mph (200 km/h)
H
130 mph (210 km/h)
V
149 mph (240 km/h)
W
168 mph (270 km/h)
Y
186 mph (299 km/h)
Note: For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph
(240 km/h), tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR. For
those with a maximum speed capability over 186 mph (299 km/h), tire
manufacturers always use the letters ZR.
8. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN): This begins with the
letters “DOT” and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards. The
next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was
manufactured, the next two are the tire size code and the last four
numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example,
the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After 2000 the numbers
go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th week of 2001. The
numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability. This
information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall.
9. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
AT: All Terrain, or
AS: All Season.
10. Tire Ply Composition and Material Used: Indicates the number of
plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and
sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the
tire and the sidewall, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
11. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum load in kilograms and
pounds that can be carried by the tire. Refer to the Safety Compliance
Certification Label, which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver’s door, for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle.
177
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
12. Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades
• Treadwear: The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half (11⁄2) times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100.
• Traction: The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B,
and C. The grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement
as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
• Temperature: The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
13. Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure: Indicates the tire
manufacturers’ maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at
which the maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is
normally higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation
pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label or Tire Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver’s door. The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than
the recommended pressure on the vehicle label.
The tire suppliers may have additional markings, notes or warnings such
as standard load, radial tubeless, etc.
178
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Additional information contained on the tire sidewall for “LT” type
tires
“LT” type tires have some additional
information beyond those of “P”
type tires; these differences are
described below.
Note: Tire Quality Grades do not
apply to this type of tire.
1. LT: Indicates a tire, designated by
the Tire and Rim Association
(T&RA), that is intended for service
on light trucks.
2. Load Range/Load Inflation
Limits: Indicates the tire’s
load-carrying capabilities and its
inflation limits.
3. Maximum Load Dual lb. (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a dual; defined
as four tires on the rear axle (a total of six or more tires on the vehicle).
4. Maximum Load Single lb. (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a single;
defined as two tires (total) on the rear axle.
179
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Information on “T” type tires
“T” type tires have some additional
information beyond those of “P”
type tires; these differences are
described below:
T145/80D16 is an example of a tire
size.
Note: The temporary tire size for
your vehicle may be different from
this example. Tire Quality Grades do
not apply to this type of tire.
1. T: Indicates a type of tire,
designated by the Tire and Rim
Association (T&RA), that is
intended for temporary service on
cars, SUVs, minivans and light
trucks.
2. 145: Indicates the nominal width
of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general,
the larger the number, the wider the tire.
3. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to
width. Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short sidewall.
4. D: Indicates a “diagonal” type tire.
R: Indicates a “radial” type tire.
5. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
Location of the tire label
You will find a Tire Label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size
and other important information located on the B-Pillar or the edge of
the driver’s door. Refer to the payload description and graphic in the
Vehicle loading — with and without a trailer section.
180
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires
of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling
and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator
to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated.
This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as
the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions
may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function properly.
181
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System complies with part 15 of the FCC
rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
WARNING: The Tire Pressure Monitoring System is NOT a
substitute for manually checking tire pressure. The tire pressure
should be checked periodically (at least monthly) using a tire gauge,
see Inflating your tires in this chapter. Failure to properly maintain
your tire pressure could increase the risk of tire failure, loss of control,
vehicle rollover and personal injury.
Changing tires with TPMS
Each road tire is equipped with
a tire pressure sensor fastened
to the inside rim of the wheel.
The pressure sensor is covered
by the tire and is not visible
unless the tire is removed. The
pressure sensor is located
opposite (180 degrees) from the
valve stem. Care must be taken
when changing the tire to avoid
damaging the sensor. It is
recommended that you always have
your tires serviced by an authorized
dealer.
The tire pressure should be checked
periodically (at least monthly) using
an accurate tire gauge, refer to
Inflating your tires in this chapter.
182
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Understanding your Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System measures pressure in your four
road tires and sends the tire pressure readings to your vehicle. The Low
Tire Pressure Warning Lamp will turn ON if the tire pressure is
significantly low. Once the light is illuminated, your tires are under
inflated and need to be inflated to the manufacturer’s recommended tire
pressure. Even if the light turns ON and a short time later turns OFF,
your tire pressure still needs to be checked. Visit www.checkmytires.org
for additional information.
When your temporary spare tire is installed
When one of your road tires needs to be replaced with the temporary
spare, the TPMS system will continue to identify an issue to remind you
that the damaged road wheel/tire needs to be repaired and put back on
your vehicle.
To restore the full functionality of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System,
have the damaged road wheel/tire repaired and remounted on your
vehicle. For additional information, refer to Changing tires with TPMS
in this section.
183
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
When you believe your system is not operating properly
The main function of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System is to warn you
when your tires need air. It can also warn you in the event the system is no
longer capable of functioning as intended. Please refer to the following
chart for information concerning your Tire Pressure Monitoring System:
Low Tire Pressure Possible cause Customer Action Required
Warning Light
Solid Warning Light Tire(s)
1. Check your tire pressure to
under-inflated
ensure tires are properly
inflated; refer to Inflating your
tires in this chapter.
2. After inflating your tires to
the manufacturer’s
recommended inflation pressure
as shown on the Tire Label
(located on the edge of driver’s
door or the B-Pillar), the
vehicle must be driven for at
least two minutes over 20 mph
(32 km/h) before the light will
turn OFF.
Spare tire in
Your temporary spare tire is in
use
use. Repair the damaged road
wheel/tire and reinstall it on the
vehicle to restore system
functionality. For a description
on how the system functions,
refer to When your temporary
spare tire is installed in this
section.
TPMS
If your tires are properly
malfunction
inflated and your spare tire is
not in use and the light remains
ON, have the system inspected
by your authorized dealer.
184
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Low Tire Pressure Possible cause Customer Action Required
Warning Light
Flashing Warning
Spare tire in
Your temporary spare tire is in
Light
use
use. Repair the damaged road
wheel and re-mount it on the
vehicle to restore system
functionality. For a description
of how the system functions
under these conditions, refer to
When your temporary spare
tire is installed in this section.
TPMS
If your tires are properly
malfunction
inflated and your spare tire is
not in use and the TPMS
warning light still flashes, have
the system inspected by your
authorized dealer.
When inflating your tires
When putting air into your tires (such as at a gas station or in your
garage), the Tire Pressure Monitoring System may not respond
immediately to the air added to your tires.
It may take up to two minutes of driving over 20 mph (32 km/h) for the
light to turn OFF after you have filled your tires to the recommended
inflation pressure.
How temperature affects your tire pressure
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) monitors tire pressure in
each pneumatic tire. While driving in a normal manner, a typical
passenger tire inflation pressure may increase approximately 2 to 4 psi
(14 to 28 kPa) from a cold start situation. If the vehicle is stationary
over night with the outside temperature significantly lower than the
daytime temperature, the tire pressure may decrease approximately 3 psi
(20.7 kPa) for a drop of 30° F (16.6°C) in ambient temperature. This
lower pressure value may be detected by the TPMS as being significantly
lower than the recommended inflation pressure and activate the TPMS
warning for low tire pressure. If the low tire pressure warning light is
ON, visually check each tire to verify that no tire is flat. (If one or more
tires are flat, repair as necessary.) Check air pressure in the road tires. If
any tire is under-inflated, carefully drive the vehicle to the nearest
location where air can be added to the tires. Inflate all the tires to the
recommended inflation pressure.
185
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
SNOW TIRES AND CHAINS
WARNING: Snow tires must be the same size, load index, speed
rating as those originally provided by Ford. Use of any tire or
wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and
performance of your vehicle, which could result in an increased risk of
loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
Additionally, the use of non-recommended tires and wheels could
cause steering, suspension, axle or transfer case/power transfer unit
failure.
The tires on your vehicle have all weather treads to provide traction in
rain and snow. However, in some climates, you may need to use snow
tires and chains. If you need to use chains, it is recommended that steel
wheels (of the same size and specifications) be used, as chains may chip
aluminum wheels.
Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and chains:
• Use only SAE class ⬙S⬙ cables or equivalent on the front axle for
P205/60R16 equipped vehicles. SAE class “S” chains or other
conventional link chains may cause damage to the vehicles wheel
house and/or body.
• Do not install tire chains, cables, or optional traction devices on the
rear tires. This could cause damage to the vehicle’s wheel house or
body.
• Do not use tire chains, cables, or optional traction devices with
optional P225/50R17 or P225/45R18 tires.
• Install cable chains securely, verifying that the cables do not touch any
wiring, brake lines or fuel lines.
• Drive cautiously. If you hear the cables rub or bang against your
vehicle, stop and re-tighten the cables. If this does not work, remove
the cables to prevent damage to your vehicle.
• If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle.
• Remove the tire cables when they are no longer needed. Do not use
tire cables on dry roads.
• The suspension insulation and bumpers will help prevent vehicle
damage. Do not remove these components from your vehicle when
using snow tires and chains.
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h) with tire cables on your vehicle.
186
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
VEHICLE LOADING
This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle to keep
your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating capability. Properly
loading your vehicle will provide maximum return of vehicle design
performance. Before loading your vehicle, familiarize yourself with the
following terms for determining your vehicle’s weight ratings from the
vehicle’s Tire Label or Safety Compliance Certification Label:
Base Curb Weight – is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of
fuel and all standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or
optional equipment.
Vehicle Curb Weight – is the weight of your new vehicle when you
picked it up from your authorized dealer plus any aftermarket
equipment.
Payload – is the combined weight of cargo and passengers that the
vehicle is carrying. The maximum payload for your vehicle can be found
on the Tire Label on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door
(vehicles exported outside the US and Canada may not have a Tire
Label). Look for “THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND
CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX kg OR XXX lb.” for
maximum payload. The payload listed on the Tire Label is the maximum
payload for the vehicle as built by the assembly plant. If any aftermarket
or authorized-dealer installed equipment has been installed on the
vehicle, the weight of the equipment must be subtracted from the
payload listed on the Tire Label in order to determine the new payload.
WARNING: The appropriate loading capacity of your vehicle can
be limited either by volume capacity (how much space is
available) or by payload capacity (how much weight the vehicle should
carry). Once you have reached the maximum payload of your vehicle,
do not add more cargo, even if there is space available. Overloading or
improperly loading your vehicle can contribute to loss of vehicle
control and vehicle rollover.
187
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Example only:
Cargo Weight – includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight,
including cargo and optional equipment.
GAW (Gross Axle Weight) – is the total weight placed on each axle
(front and rear) – including vehicle curb weight and all payload.
188
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). These
numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label
located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. The total
load on each axle must never exceed its GAWR.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) – is the Vehicle Curb Weight + cargo +
passengers.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating) – is the maximum
allowable weight of the fully loaded
vehicle (including all options,
equipment, passengers and cargo).
The GVWR is shown on the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label located on the B-Pillar or
the edge of the driver’s door.
The GVW must never exceed the
GVWR.
WARNING: Exceeding the Safety Compliance Certification Label
vehicle weight rating limits could result in substandard vehicle
handling or performance, engine, transmission and/or structural
damage, serious damage to the vehicle, loss of control and personal
injury.
WARNING: Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on
the Safety Compliance Certification Label.
189
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
WARNING: Do not use replacement tires with lower load
carrying capacities than the original tires because they may
lower the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires
with a higher limit than the original tires do not increase the GVWR
and GAWR limitations.
WARNING: Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could
result in serious damage to the vehicle and/or personal injury.
Steps for determining the correct load limit:
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX
kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs. and
there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 x 150)
= 650 lb.). In metric units (635-340 (5 x 68) = 295 kg.)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
The following gives you a few examples on how to calculate the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity:
• Another example for your vehicle with 1400 lb. (635 kg) of cargo and
luggage capacity. You decide to go golfing. Is there enough load
capacity to carry you, 4 of your friends and all the golf bags? You and
four friends average 220 lb. (99 kg) each and the golf bags weigh
approximately 30 lb. (13.5 kg) each. The calculation would be: 1400 –
(5 x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1400 - 1100 - 150 = 150 lb. Yes, you have
enough load capacity in your vehicle to transport four friends and
your golf bags. In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg (5 x 99 kg) - (5 x 13.5 kg) = 635 - 495 - 67.5 = 72.5 kg.
190
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
• A final example for your vehicle with 1400 lb. (635 kg) of cargo and
luggage capacity. You and one of your friends decide to pick up
cement from the local home improvement store to finish that patio
you have been planning for the past 2 years. Measuring the inside of
the vehicle with the rear seat folded down, you have room for
12-100 lb. (45 kg) bags of cement. Do you have enough load capacity
to transport the cement to your home? If you and your friend each
weigh 220 lb. (99 kg), the calculation would be: 1400 - (2 x 220) (12 x 100) = 1400 - 440 - 1200 = - 240 lb. No, you do not have
enough cargo capacity to carry that much weight. In metric units, the
calculation would be: 635 kg - (2 x 99 kg) - (12 x 45 kg) = 635 - 198 540 = -103 kg. You will need to reduce the load weight by at least
240 lb. (104 kg). If you remove 3-100 lb. (45 kg) cement bags, then
the load calculation would be:
1400 - (2 x 220) - (9 x 100) = 1400 - 440 - 900 = 60 lb. Now you have
the load capacity to transport the cement and your friend home. In
metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg - (2 x 99 kg) (9 x 45 kg) = 635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kg.
The above calculations also assume that the loads are positioned in your
vehicle in a manner that does not overload the Front or the Rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating specified for your vehicle on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label found on the edge of the driver’s door.
TRAILER TOWING
WARNING: Never tow a trailer with this vehicle. Your vehicle is
not equipped to tow. No towing packages are available through
an authorized dealer.
RECREATIONAL TOWING
Follow these guidelines if you have a need for recreational (RV) towing.
An example of recreational towing would be towing your vehicle behind
a motorhome. These guidelines are designed to ensure that your
transmission is not damaged.
Front Wheel Drive (FWD) vehicles with automatic transmissions:
Do not tow the vehicle with the front drive wheels on the ground. It is
recommended to tow your vehicle with the front drive wheels on a dolly
or with all four (4) wheels off the ground on a car-hauling trailer.
In case of a roadside emergency with a disabled vehicle, see Wrecker
towing in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.
191
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Front Wheel Drive (FWD) vehicles with manual transmissions: If
your vehicle is equipped with a manual transmission, shifting the
transmission into neutral (N) permits “flat-towing” (all wheels on the
ground) for pulling behind a motorhome.
Before you tow your vehicle:
• Release the parking brake.
• Move the gearshift to the neutral position.
• Turn the key in the ignition to the off position.
• The maximum recommended speed is 70 mph (113 km/h).
• The maximum recommended distance is unlimited.
• The vehicle must be towed in the forward position to ensure no
damage is done to the internal transmission components.
In addition, it is recommended that you follow the instructions provided
by the aftermarket manufacturer of the towing equipment, if provided.
In case of a roadside emergency with a disabled vehicle, see Wrecker
towing in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.
All Wheel Drive (AWD) vehicles:
Do not tow your vehicle with any wheels on the ground, as vehicle or
transmission damage may occur. It is recommended to tow your vehicle
with all four (4) wheels off the ground such as when using a car-hauling
trailer. Otherwise, no recreational towing is permitted.
In case of a roadside emergency with a disabled vehicle, see Wrecker
towing in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.
192
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Driving
STARTING
Positions of the ignition
1. Off— locks the gearshift lever
and allows key removal. This
position also shuts the engine and
all electrical accessories off.
2. Accessory— allows the electrical
accessories such as the radio to
operate while the engine is not
running.
3. On— all electrical circuits operational. Warning lights illuminated. Key
position when driving.
4. Start— cranks the engine. Release the key as soon as the engine
starts.
Starting your vehicle
Engine starting is controlled by the powertrain control system.
This system meets all Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment
standard requirements regulating the impulse electrical field strength of
radio noise.
When starting a fuel-injected engine, don’t press the accelerator before
or during starting. Only use the accelerator when you have difficulty
starting the engine. For more information on starting the vehicle, refer to
Starting the engine in this chapter.
To avoid potential transmission damage at extremely cold temperatures
(below -20°F [-30°C]), it is recommended that the vehicle be warmed up
to normal operating temperature before driving at highway speeds above
50 mph (80 km/h). Normal operating temperature is normally reached
after 10 minutes of moderate driving or idling.
WARNING: Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce
very high temperatures in the engine and exhaust system,
creating the risk of fire or other damage.
WARNING: Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass
or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the
engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
193
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Driving
WARNING: Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in
other enclosed areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open
the garage door before you start the engine. See Guarding against
exhaust fumes in this chapter for more instructions.
WARNING: If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have
your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you
smell exhaust fumes.
Important safety precautions
When the engine starts, the idle RPM runs faster to warm the engine. If
the engine idle speed does not slow down automatically, have the vehicle
checked.
Before starting the vehicle:
1. Make sure all vehicle occupants buckle their safety belts. For more
information on safety belts and their proper usage, refer to the Seating
and Safety Restraints chapter.
2. Make sure the headlamps and electrical accessories are off.
If starting a vehicle with an
2
1
automatic transmission:
• Make sure the parking brake is
set.
194
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Driving
• Make sure the gearshift is in P
(Park).
If starting a vehicle with a manual
transmission:
• Make sure the parking brake is
set.
• Push the clutch pedal to the
floor.
3. Turn the key to 3 (on) without
turning the key to 4 (start).
Some warning lights will briefly illuminate. See Warning lights and
chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter for more information
regarding the warning lights.
195
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Driving
Starting the engine
1. Turn the key to 3 (on) without
turning the key to 4 (start).
2. Turn the key to 4 (start), then
release the key as soon as the
engine begins cranking. Your vehicle
has a computer assisted cranking
system that assists in starting the
engine. After releasing the key from
the 4 (start) position, the engine may continue cranking for up to
10 seconds or until the vehicle starts.
3. After idling for a few seconds, apply the brake, shift into gear and
drive.
Note: If the engine does not start on the first try, turn the key to the off
position, wait 10 seconds and try step 2 again. If the engine still fails to
start, press the accelerator to the floor and try step 2 again, keeping the
accelerator on the floor until the engine begins to accelerate above
cranking speeds; this will allow the engine to crank with the fuel shut off
in case the engine is flooded with fuel.
Guarding against exhaust fumes
Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes. Take precautions to avoid
its dangerous effects.
WARNING: If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have
your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you
smell exhaust fumes.
Important ventilating information
If the engine is idling while the vehicle is stopped for a long period of
time, open the windows at least one inch (2.5 cm) or adjust the heating
or air conditioning to bring in fresh air.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (IF EQUIPPED)
An engine block heater warms the engine coolant which aids in starting
and allows the heater/defroster system to respond quickly. If your vehicle
is equipped with this system, your equipment includes a heater element
which is installed in your engine block and a wire harness which allows
the user to connect the system to a grounded 120 volt a/c electrical
source. The block heater system is most effective when outdoor
temperatures reach below 0°F (-18°C).
196
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Driving
WARNING: Failure to follow engine block heater instructions
could result in property damage or physical injury.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of electrical shock, do not use
your heater with ungrounded electrical systems or two-pronged
(cheater) adapters.
Prior to using the engine block heater, follow these recommendations for
proper and safe operation:
• For your safety, use an outdoor extension cord that is product
certified by Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL) or Canadian Standards
Association (CSA). Use only an extension cord that can be used
outdoors, in cold temperatures, and is clearly marked ⬙Suitable for Use
with Outdoor Appliances.⬙ Never use an indoor extension cord
outdoors; it could result in an electric shock or fire hazard.
• Use a 16 gauge outdoor extension cord, minimum.
• Use as short an extension cord as possible.
• Do not use multiple extension cords. Instead, use one extension cord
which is long enough to reach from the engine block heater cord to
the outlet without stretching.
• Make certain that the extension cord is in excellent condition (not
patched or spliced). Store your extension cord indoors at
temperatures above 32°F (0°C). Outdoor conditions can deteriorate
extension cords over a period of time.
• To reduce the risk of electrical shock, do not use your heater with
ungrounded electrical systems or two pronged (cheater) adapters.
Also ensure that the block heater, especially the cord, is in good
condition before use.
• Make sure that when in operation, the extension cord plug /engine
block heater cord plug connection is free and clear of water in order
to prevent possible shock or fire.
• Be sure that areas where the vehicle is parked are clean and clear of
all combustibles such as petroleum products, dust, rags, paper and
similar items.
• Be sure that the engine block heater, heater cord and extension cord
are solidly connected. A poor connection can cause the cord to
become very hot and may result in an electrical shock or fire. Be sure
to check for heat anywhere in the electrical hookup once the system
has been operating for approximately a half hour.
197
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Driving
• Finally, have the engine block heater system checked during your fall
tune-up to be sure it’s in good working order.
How to use the engine block heater
Ensure the receptacle terminals are clean and dry prior to use. To clean
them, use a dry cloth.
Depending on the type of factory installed equipment, your engine block
heater system may consume anywhere between 400 watts or 1000 watts
of energy per hour. Your factory installed block heater system does not
have a thermostat; however, maximum temperature is attained after
approximately three hours of operation. Block heater operation longer
than three hours will not improve system performance and will
unnecessarily use additional electricity.
Make sure system is unplugged and properly stowed before driving the
vehicle. While not in use, make sure the protective cover seals the
prongs of the engine block heater cord plug.
BRAKES
Occasional brake noise is normal. If a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding
or continuous squeal sound is present, the brake linings may be worn-out
and should be inspected by an authorized dealer. If the vehicle has
continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking, the
vehicle should be inspected by an authorized dealer.
Refer to Brake system warning
!
P
light in the Instrument Cluster
chapter for information on the brake
BRAKE
system warning light.
Four-wheel anti-lock brake system (ABS)
Your vehicle is equipped with an Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). This
system helps you maintain steering control during emergency stops by
keeping the brakes from locking. The ABS operates by detecting the
onset of wheel lockup during brake application and compensates for this
tendency. Noise from the ABS pump motor and brake pedal pulsation
may be observed during ABS braking; any pulsation or mechanical noise
you may feel or hear is normal. In addition, the ABS performs a
self-check after you start the engine and begin to drive away. A brief
mechanical noise may be heard during this test. This is normal.
198
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Driving
ABS warning lamp
The ABS lamp in the instrument
cluster momentarily illuminates
ABS
when the ignition is turned on. If
the light does not illuminate during
start up, remains on or flashes, the
ABS may be disabled and may need to be serviced.
Even when the ABS is disabled and
!
P
the ABS light is on, normal braking
is still effective. If your BRAKE
BRAKE
warning lamp illuminates with the
parking brake released, have your
brake system serviced immediately.
Using ABS
When hard braking is required, apply continuous force on the brake
pedal; do not pump the brake pedal since this will reduce the
effectiveness of the ABS and will increase your vehicle’s stopping
distance. The ABS will be activated immediately, allowing you to retain
full steering control during hard braking and on slippery surfaces.
However, the ABS does not decrease stopping distance and does not
decrease the time necessary to apply the brakes.
Parking brake
To set the parking brake (1), pull
the parking brake handle up as far
as possible.
The BRAKE warning lamp will
illuminate and will remain
illuminated until the parking brake
is released.
2
1
!
P
BRAKE
To release, press and hold the button (2), pull the handle up slightly,
then push the handle down.
199
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Driving
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure
that the gearshift is securely latched in P (Park) (automatic
transmission) or in 1 (First) (manual transmission).
WARNING: If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake
warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be
working properly. See your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
ADVANCETRAC姞 STABILITY ENHANCEMENT SYSTEM
(IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Vehicle modifications involving braking system,
aftermarket roof racks, suspension, steering system, tire
construction and/or wheel/tire size may change the handling
characteristics of the vehicle and may adversely affect the performance
of the AdvanceTrac威 system. In addition, installing any stereo
loudspeakers may interfere with and adversely affect the AdvanceTrac威
system. Install any aftermarket stereo loudspeaker as far as possible
from the front center console, the tunnel, and the front seats in order
to minimize the risk of interfering with the Advance Trac sensors.
Reducing the effectiveness of the AdvanceTrac威 system could lead to
an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
WARNING: Remember that even advanced technology cannot
defy the laws of physics. It’s always possible to lose control of a
vehicle due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Aggressive
driving on any road condition can cause you to lose control of your
vehicle increasing the risk of personal injury or property damage.
Activation of the AdvanceTrac威 system is an indication that at least
some of the tires have exceeded their ability to grip the road; this
could reduce the operator’s ability to control the vehicle potentially
resulting in a loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury
and death. If your AdvanceTrac威 system activates, SLOW DOWN.
200
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Driving
WARNING: If a failure has been detected within the
will illuminate
AdvanceTrac威 system, the ⬙sliding car⬙ icon
steadily. Verify that the AdvanceTrac威 system is not manually disabled
(push the AdvanceTrac威 “Off “ button located on the center of the
still illuminates steadily,
instrument panel). If the ⬙sliding car⬙ icon
have the system service by an authorized dealer immediately.
Your vehicle may be equipped with the AdvanceTrac system. The
AdvanceTrac system provides the following stability enhancement
features for certain driving situations:
• Traction Control (TCS), which functions to help avoid drive-wheel
spin and loss of traction.
• Electronic Stability Control (ESC), which functions to help avoid skids
or lateral slides
The AdvanceTrac威 system automatically enables each time the engine is
started. All features of the AdvanceTrac威 system (TCS and ESC) are
active and monitor the vehicle from start-up. However, the system will
only intervene if the driving situation requires it.
The AdvanceTrac威 system includes
an AdvanceTrac威 ⬙Off⬙ button on
the center of the instrument panel,
in the
and a “sliding car” icon
instrument cluster. The “sliding car”
in the instrument cluster
icon
will illuminate temporarily during start-up as part of a normal system
self-check, or during driving if a driving situation causes the
illuminates
AdvanceTrac威 system to operate. If the “sliding car” icon
steadily, verify that the AdvanceTrac威 system is not manually disabled by
pressing the AdvanceTrac威 ⬙Off⬙ button located on the center stack of
remains steadily
the instrument panel. If the “sliding car” icon
illuminated, have the system serviced by an authorized dealer
immediately. If equipped with a message center, the vehicle will also
indicate a failure with the AdvanceTrac威 system.
When AdvanceTrac威 performs a normal system self-check, some drivers
may notice a slight movement of the brake, and/or a rumble, grunting, or
grinding noise after startup and when driving off.
When an event occurs that activates AdvanceTrac威 you may experience
the following:
201
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Driving
•
•
•
•
A slight deceleration of the vehicle
The “sliding car”
indicator light will flash.
A vibration in the pedal when your foot is on the brake pedal
If the driving condition is severe and your foot is not on the brake, the
brake pedal may move as the systems applies higher brake forces. You
may also hear a whoosh of air from under the instrument panel during
this severe condition.
• The brake pedal may feel stiffer than usual.
Traction Control (TCS)
Traction Control is a driver aid feature that helps your vehicle maintain
traction of the wheels, typically when driving on slippery and/or hilly
road surfaces, by detecting and controlling wheel spin.
Excessive wheel spin is controlled in two ways, which may work
separately or in tandem, Engine Traction Control and Brake Traction
Control. Engine Traction Control works to limit drive-wheel spin by
momentarily reducing engine power. Brake Traction Control works to
limit wheel spin by momentarily applying the brakes to the wheel that is
slipping. Traction Control is most active at low speeds.
During Traction Control events the “sliding car” icon
in the
instrument cluster will flash.
If the Traction Control system is activated excessively in a short period
of time, the braking portion of the system may become temporarily
disabled to allow the brakes to cool down. In this situation, Traction
Control will use only engine power reduction or transfer to help control
the wheels from over-spinning. When the brakes have cooled down, the
system will regain all features. Anti-lock braking, and ESC are not
affected by this condition and will continue to function during the
cool-down period.
The Engine Traction Control and Brake Traction Control system may be
deactivated in certain situations. See the Switching Off AdvanceTrac威
section below.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) may enhance your vehicle’s directional
stability during adverse maneuvers, for example when cornering severely
or avoiding objects in the roadway. ESC operates by applying brakes to
one or more of the wheels individually and, if necessary, reducing engine
power if the system detects that the vehicle is about to skid or slide
laterally.
202
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Driving
During Electronic Stability Control events the “sliding car” icon
in the
instrument cluster will flash.
Certain adverse driving maneuvers may activate the Electronic Stability
Control system, which include but are not limited to:
• Taking a turn too fast
• Maneuvering quickly to avoid an accident, pedestrian or obstacle
• Driving over a patch of ice or other slippery surfaces
• Changing lanes on a snow-rutted road
• Entering a snow-free road from a snow-covered side street, or vice
versa
• Entering a paved road from a gravel road, or vice versa
• Cornering while towing a heavily loaded trailer (refer to Trailer
towing in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter).
Switching Off AdvanceTrac威
If the vehicle is stuck in snow, mud or sand, and seems to lose engine
power, switching off certain features of the AdvanceTrac威 system may be
beneficial because the wheels are allowed to spin. This will restore full
engine power and will enhance momentum through the obstacle. To
switch off the AdvanceTrac威 system press the AdvanceTrac威 ⬙Off⬙
button. Full features of the AdvanceTrac威 system can be restored by
pressing the AdvanceTrac威 ⬙Off⬙ button again or by turning off and
restarting the engine.
will
If you switch off the AdvanceTrac威 system, the ⬙sliding car⬙ icon
illuminate steadily. Pressing the AdvanceTrac威 ⬙Off⬙ button again will
.
turn off the lighted button, ⬙sliding car⬙ icon
In R (Reverse), ABS and the Engine and Brake Traction Control features
will continue to function; however, ESC is disabled.
203
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Driving
Button functions
Default at start-up
Button pressed
momentarily
Button pressed
again after
deactivation
AdvanceTrac威 Features
“Sliding car”
ESC
icon
Illuminated
during bulb
Enabled
check
Traction
Control
Enabled
Illuminated solid
Enabled
Disabled
Not illuminated
Enabled
Enabled
TRACTION CONTROL™ (IF EQUIPPED)
The Traction Control™ system helps you maintain the stability and
steerability of your vehicle, especially on slippery road surfaces such as
snow- or ice-covered roads and gravel roads. The system will allow your
vehicle to make better use of available traction in these conditions.
During Traction Control™ operation,
the traction control active light will
illuminate, you may hear an electric
motor type of sound coming from
the engine compartment, and the
engine may not “rev-up” when you
push further on the accelerator. This is normal system behavior and
should be no reason for concern.
WARNING: Aggressive driving in any road conditions can cause
you to lose control of your vehicle increasing the risk of severe
personal injury or property damage. The occurrence of a Traction
Control™ event is an indication that at least some of the tires have
exceeded their ability to grip the road; this may lead to an increased
risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and
death. If you experience a severe road event, SLOW DOWN.
204
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Driving
The Traction Control™ switch is
located on the instrument panel.
The Traction Control™ system will
automatically turn on every time the
ignition is turned off and on. The
Traction Control™ system should
normally be left on.
If you should become stuck in snow
or ice or on a very slippery road
surface, try switching the Traction
Control™ system off by pressing the
switch on the instrument panel. Switching the Traction Control™ system
off may allow excess wheel spin to “dig” the vehicle out and enable a
successful “rocking” maneuver. When the Traction Control™ system is
off, an indicator light will illuminate and will remain on until the system
is turned back on or the ignition is turned off and on. Remember to
switch the Traction Control™ system back on once the vehicle is no
longer stuck.
If a system fault is detected, the traction control active light will
illuminate, the Traction Control™ button will not turn the system on or
off and your vehicle should be serviced by an authorized dealer.
STEERING
To help prevent damage to the power steering system:
• Never hold the steering wheel at its furthest turning points (until it
stops) for more than a few seconds when the engine is running.
• Do not operate the vehicle with a low power steering pump fluid level
(below the MIN mark on the reservoir).
• Some noise is normal during operation. If excessive, check for low
power steering pump fluid level before seeking service by your
authorized dealer.
• Heavy or uneven steering efforts may be caused by low power steering
pump fluid level. Check for low power steering pump fluid level before
seeking service by your authorized dealer.
• Do not fill the power steering pump reservoir above the MAX mark on
the reservoir, as this may result in leaks from the reservoir.
If the power steering system breaks down (or if the engine is turned
off), you can steer the vehicle manually, but it takes more effort.
205
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Driving
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
• an improperly inflated tire
• uneven tire wear
• loose or worn suspension components
• loose or worn steering components
• improper steering alignment
A high crown in the road or high crosswinds may also make the steering
seem to wander/pull.
Speed sensitive steering
The steering in your vehicle is speed sensitive. At high speeds, steering
assist will decrease to improve steering feel. At lower speeds,
maneuverability will be increased.
If the amount of effort required to steer your vehicle changes while
driving at a constant vehicle speed, have the power steering system
checked by your authorized dealer.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OPERATION
Brake-shift interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift interlock feature that prevents
the gearshift lever from being moved from P (Park) when the ignition is
in the on position unless brake pedal is depressed.
If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P (Park) with ignition in
the on position and the brake pedal depressed:
206
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Driving
1. Apply the parking brake, turn
ignition key to off, then remove the
key.
2. Using a screwdriver (or similar
tool), remove the protective cover
to the interlock release access hole
on the console.
3. Insert the screwdriver (or similar
tool) into the access hole and press
downward while pulling the
gearshift lever out of the P (Park)
position and into the N (Neutral)
position.
4. Remove the tool and reinstall the
protective cover.
5. Start the vehicle and release the
parking brake.
If it is necessary to use the above procedure to move the gearshift lever,
it is possible that a fuse has blown or the vehicle’s brakelamps are not
operating properly. Refer to Fuses and relays in the Roadside
Emergencies chapter.
WARNING: Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the
brakelamps are working.
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure
the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the off
position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
WARNING: If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake
warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be
working properly. See your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
207
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Driving
Understanding the gearshift positions of the 5–speed automatic
transmission (if equipped)
P (Park)
This position locks the transmission and prevents the front wheels from
turning.
To put your vehicle in gear:
• Depress the brake pedal
• Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear
To put your vehicle in P (Park):
• Come to a complete stop
• Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P (Park)
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure
the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the off
position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
R (Reverse)
With the gearshift lever in R (Reverse), the vehicle will move backward.
Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R
(Reverse).
208
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Driving
N (Neutral)
With the gearshift lever in N (Neutral), the vehicle can be started and is
free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down while in this position.
D (Drive)
The normal driving position for the best fuel economy. Transmission
operates in gears one through five.
L (Low)
This position:
• Provides increased engine braking during downhill/mountain driving.
• Provides extended shift scheduling, allowing both upshifts and
downshifts, at a higher overall RPM to provide optimum engine
braking.
• Is not intended for use under extended or normal driving conditions
and results in lower fuel economy.
Understanding the gearshift positions of the 6–speed automatic
transmission (if equipped)
P (Park)
This position locks the transmission and prevents the front wheels from
turning.
209
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Driving
To put your vehicle in gear:
• Depress the brake pedal
• Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear
To put your vehicle in P (Park):
• Come to a complete stop
• Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P (Park)
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure
the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the off
position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
R (Reverse)
With the gearshift lever in R (Reverse), the vehicle will move backward.
Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R
(Reverse).
N (Neutral)
With the gearshift lever in N (Neutral), the vehicle can be started and is
free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down while in this position.
D (Drive)
The normal driving position for the best fuel economy. Transmission
operates in gears one through six.
L (Low)
This position:
• Provides increased engine braking during downhill/mountain driving.
• Provides extended shift scheduling, allowing both upshifts and
downshifts, at a higher overall RPM to provide optimum engine braking.
• Is not intended for use under extended or normal driving conditions
and results in lower fuel economy.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow, it may be rocked out by
shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts in a
steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.
Do not rock the vehicle for more than a minute or damage to the
transmission and tires may occur, or the engine may overheat.
210
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Driving
MANUAL TRANSMISSION OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED)
1
3
5
2
4
R
Using the clutch
Manual transmission vehicles have a starter interlock that prevents
cranking the engine unless the clutch pedal is fully depressed.
To start the vehicle:
1. Make sure the parking brake is fully set.
2. Press the clutch pedal to the floor, then put the gearshift lever in the
neutral position.
3. Start the engine.
4. Press the brake pedal and move the gearshift lever to the desired
gear; 1 (First) or R (Reverse).
5. Release the parking brake, then slowly release the clutch pedal while
slowly pressing on the accelerator.
During each shift, the clutch pedal must be fully depressed to the floor.
Make sure the floor mat is properly positioned so it doesn’t interfere with
the full extension of the clutch pedal.
Failure to fully depress the clutch pedal to the floor may cause
increased shift efforts, prematurely wear transmission
components or damage the transmission.
Do not drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal or use the
clutch pedal to hold your vehicle at a standstill while waiting on a
hill. These actions will severely reduce the life of the clutch and
could nullify a clutch warranty claim.
211
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Driving
Recommended shift speeds
Do not downshift into 1 (First) when your vehicle is moving
faster than 15 mph (24 km/h). This will damage the clutch.
Upshift according to the following chart:
Recommended upshifts (for best fuel economy) when
accelerating
5-speed manual transmission
Shift from:
1-2
14 mph (23 km/h)
2-3
24 mph (39 km/h)
3-4
32 mph (51 km/h)
4-5
44 mph (71 km/h)
Reverse
Make sure that your vehicle is at a complete stop before you shift
into R (Reverse). Failure to do so may damage the transmission.
Hold the clutch pedal down and move the gearshift lever into the neutral
position. Wait at least three seconds before shifting into R (Reverse).
Note: The gearshift lever can only be moved into R (Reverse) by moving
it from left of 3 (Third) and 4 (Fourth) before shifting into R (Reverse).
This is a lockout feature that protects the transmission from accidentally
being shifted into R (Reverse) from 5 (Fifth).
If R (Reverse) is not fully engaged, press the clutch pedal down and
return the gearshift to the neutral position. Release the clutch pedal for
a moment, then press it down and shift to R (Reverse) again.
Parking your vehicle
1. Apply the brake and shift into the neutral position.
2. Fully apply the parking brake, then shift into 1 (First).
3. Turn the ignition off.
WARNING: Do not park your vehicle in Neutral, it may move
unexpectedly and injure someone. Use 1 (First) gear and set the
parking brake fully.
212
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Driving
Removing the key
Turn the ignition to the off position, and remove the key.
REVERSE SENSING SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The Reverse Sensing System (RSS) sounds a tone to warn the driver of
obstacles near the rear bumper when the R (Reverse) is selected and the
vehicle is moving at speeds less than 3 mph (5 km/h). The system is not
effective at speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h) and may not detect certain
angular or moving objects.
WARNING: To help avoid personal injury, please read and
understand the limitations of the reverse sensing system as
contained in this section. Reverse sensing is only an aid for some
(generally large and fixed) objects when moving in reverse on a flat
surface at “parking speeds”. Inclement weather may also affect the
function of the RSS; this may include reduced performance or a false
activation.
WARNING: To help avoid personal injury, always use caution
when in R (Reverse) and when using the RSS.
WARNING: This system is not designed to prevent contact with
small or moving objects. The system is designed to provide a
warning to assist the driver in detecting large stationary objects to
avoid damaging the vehicle. The system may not detect smaller
objects, particularly those close to the ground.
WARNING: Certain add-on devices such as large trailer hitches,
bike or surfboard racks and any device that may block the
normal detection zone of the RSS system may create false beeps.
213
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Driving
The RSS detects obstacles up to six
feet (two meters) from the rear
bumper with a decreased coverage
area at the outer corners of the
bumper, (refer to the figures for
approximate zone coverage areas).
As you move closer to the obstacle,
the rate of the tone increases. When
the obstacle is less than 10 inches
(25.0 cm) away, the tone will sound
continuously. If the RSS detects a
stationary or receding object further
than 10 inches (25.0 cm) from the
side of the vehicle, the tone will
sound for only three seconds. Once
the system detects an object
approaching, the tone will sound
again.
While receiving a warning the radio volume will be reduced to a
predetermined level. After the warning goes away, the radio will return
to the previous value.
The RSS automatically turns on when the gear selector is placed in R
(Reverse) and the ignition is on. A control in the message center allows
the driver to disable the system only when the ignition is on and the
gear selector is in R (Reverse). Refer to Message center in the Driver
Controls chapter for more information.
Keep the RSS sensors (located on the rear bumper/fascia) free
from snow, ice and large accumulations of dirt (do not clean the
sensors with sharp objects). If the sensors are covered, it will
affect the accuracy of the RSS.
If your vehicle sustains damage to the rear bumper/fascia, leaving
it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered causing
inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alarms.
214
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Driving
ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a full-time All Wheel Drive (AWD)
system. The AWD system is an active system, meaning it not only
responds to wheel slip between the front and rear axles but also has the
ability to anticipate wheel slip and transfer torque to the rear wheels
before slip occurs. The AWD system is active all the time and requires no
input from the operator.
All components of the AWD system are sealed for life and require no
maintenance.
If your vehicle is equipped with AWD, a spare tire of a different size
other than the tire provided should never be used. A dissimilar spare tire
size (other than the spare tire provided) or major dissimilar tire sizes
between the front and rear axles could cause the AWD system to stop
functioning and default to front wheel drive.
Note: Your AWD vehicle is not intended for off-road use. The AWD
feature gives your vehicle some limited off-road capabilities in which
driving surfaces are relatively level, obstruction-free and otherwise
similar to normal on-road driving conditions. Operating your vehicle
under other than those conditions could subject the vehicle to excessive
stress which might result in damage which is not covered under your
warranty.
Driving on slippery surfaces with AWD vehicles
AWD vehicles are specially equipped for driving on sand, snow, mud and
rough roads and have operating characteristics that are somewhat
different from conventional vehicles, both on and off the highway.
When driving at slow speeds off-highway under high outside
temperatures, use L (Low) gear when possible. L (Low) gear operation
will maximize the engine and transmission cooling capability.
Under severe operating conditions, the A/C may cycle on and off to
protect overheating of the engine.
Basic operating principles
• Drive slower in strong crosswinds which can affect the normal steering
characteristics of your vehicle.
• Be extremely careful when driving on pavement made slippery by
loose sand, water, gravel, snow or ice.
215
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Driving
If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement
• If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement, slow down, but
avoid severe brake application, ease the vehicle back onto the
pavement only after reducing your speed. Do not turn the steering
wheel too sharply while returning to the road surface.
• It may be safer to stay on the apron or shoulder of the road and slow
down gradually before returning to the pavement. You may lose
control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering wheel too
sharply or abruptly.
• It often may be less risky to strike small objects, such as highway
reflectors, with minor damage to your vehicle rather than attempt a
sudden return to the pavement which could cause the vehicle to slide
sideways out of control or rollover. Remember, your safety and the
safety of others should be your primary concern.
If your vehicle gets stuck
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it may be rocked out by
shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts, in a
steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
If your vehicle is equipped with Traction Control™, it may be beneficial
to disengage the Traction Control™ system while attempting to rock the
vehicle.
Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.
Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes or damage
to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may
overheat.
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure
the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the
LOCK position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
WARNING: If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake
warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be
working properly. See your authorized dealer.
WARNING: Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h).
The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
216
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Driving
Emergency maneuvers
• In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn
must be made, remember to avoid “over-driving” your vehicle (i.e.,
turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid
the emergency). Excessive steering will result in less vehicle control,
not more. Additionally, smooth variations of the accelerator and/or
brake pedal pressure should be utilized if changes in vehicle speed are
called for. Avoid abrupt steering, acceleration or braking which could
result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover
and/or personal injury. Use all available road surface to return the
vehicle to a safe direction of travel.
• In the event of an emergency stop, avoid skidding the tires and do not
attempt any sharp steering wheel movements.
• If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another (i.e., from
concrete to gravel) there will be a change in the way the vehicle
responds to a maneuver (steering, acceleration or braking). Again,
avoid these abrupt inputs.
AWD Systems (if equipped)
AWD uses all four wheels to power the vehicle. This increases traction,
enabling you to drive over terrain and road conditions that a
conventional two-wheel drive vehicle cannot.
Sand
When driving over sand, try to keep all four wheels on the most solid
area of the trail. Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift to a lower
gear and drive steadily through the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly
and avoid spinning the wheels.
If your vehicle is equipped with an automatic transmission: When
driving at slow speeds in deep sand under high outside temperatures,
use L (Low) gear when possible. L (Low) gear operation will maximize
the engine and transmission cooling capability.
Under severe operating conditions, the A/C may cycle on and off to
protect overheating of the engine.
Avoid excessive speed because vehicle momentum can work against you
and cause the vehicle to become stuck to the point that assistance may
be required from another vehicle. Remember, you may be able to back
out the way you came if you proceed with caution.
Mud and water
If you must drive through high water, drive slowly. Traction or brake
capability may be limited.
217
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Driving
When driving through water, determine the depth; avoid water higher
than the bottom of the wheel rims (for cars) or the bottom of the hubs
(for trucks) (if possible) and proceed slowly. If the ignition system gets
wet, the vehicle may stall.
Once through water, always try the brakes. Wet brakes do not stop the
vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be improved by moving
your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.
Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle speed or direction when you
are driving in mud. Even AWD vehicles can lose traction in slick mud. As
when you are driving over sand, apply the accelerator slowly and avoid
spinning your wheels. If the vehicle does slide, steer in the direction of
the slide until you regain control of the vehicle.
If the engine, transmission, AWD System components or axles are
submerged in water, their fluids should be checked and changed, if
necessary.
Driving through deep water may damage the engine or
transmission.
If the front or rear axle is submerged in water, the axle lubricant and
PTU (Power Transfer Unit) lubricant should be checked and changed if
necessary.
After driving through mud, clean off residue stuck to rotating driveshafts
and tires. Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating driveshafts causes an
imbalance that could damage drive components.
“Tread Lightly” is an educational
program designed to increase public
awareness of land-use regulations
and responsibilities in our nations
wilderness areas. Ford Motor
Company joins the U.S. Forest Service and the Bureau of Land
Management in encouraging you to help preserve our national forest and
other public and private lands by “treading lightly.”
Driving on hilly or sloping terrain
Although natural obstacles may make it necessary to travel diagonally up
or down a hill or steep incline, you should always try to drive straight up
or straight down. Avoid driving crosswise or turning on steep
slopes or hills. A danger lies in losing traction, slipping sideways and
possibly rolling over. Whenever driving on a hill, determine beforehand
the route you will use. Do not drive over the crest of a hill without
seeing what conditions are on the other side. Do not drive in reverse
over a hill without the aid of an observer.
218
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Driving
When climbing a steep slope or hill, start in a lower gear rather than
downshifting to a lower gear from a higher gear once the ascent has
started. This reduces strain on the engine and the possibility of stalling.
If you do stall out, do not try to turnaround because you might roll over.
It is better to back down to a safe location.
Apply just enough power to the wheels to climb the hill. Too much
power will cause the tires to slip, spin or lose traction, resulting in loss of
vehicle control.
Descend a hill in the same gear you
would use to climb up the hill to
avoid excessive brake application
and brake overheating. Do not
descend in neutral; instead,
disengage overdrive or manually
shift to a lower gear. When
descending a steep hill, avoid
sudden hard braking as you could
lose control. The front wheels have
to be turning in order to steer the
vehicle.
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, therefore apply the brakes steadily. Do
not “pump” the brakes.
Driving on snow and ice
Note: Excessive tire slippage can cause transmission damage.
AWD vehicles have advantages over 2WD vehicles in snow and ice but
can skid like any other vehicle.
Should you start to slide while driving on snowy or icy roads, turn the
steering wheel in the direction of the slide until you regain control.
Avoid sudden applications of power and quick changes of direction on
snow and ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily when starting
from a full stop.
Avoid sudden braking as well. Although an AWD vehicle may accelerate
better than a two-wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice, it won’t stop any
faster, because as in other vehicles, braking occurs at all four wheels. Do
not become overconfident as to road conditions.
219
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Driving
Make sure you allow sufficient distance between you and other vehicles
for stopping. Drive slower than usual and consider using one of the lower
gears. In emergency stopping situations, apply the brake steadily. Since
your vehicle is equipped with a four wheel anti-lock brake system (ABS),
do not “pump” the brakes. Refer to the Brakes section of this chapter
for additional information on the operation of the anti-lock brake system.
Maintenance and Modifications
The suspension and steering systems on your vehicle have been designed
and tested to provide predictable performance whether loaded or empty
and durable load carrying capability. For this reason, Ford Motor
Company strongly recommends that you do not make modifications such
as adding or removing parts (such as lift kits or stabilizer bars) or by
using replacement parts not equivalent to the original factory equipment.
Any modifications to a vehicle that raise the center of gravity can make
it more likely the vehicle will rollover as a result of a loss of control.
Ford Motor Company recommends that caution be used with any vehicle
equipped with a high load or device (such as ladder or luggage racks).
Failure to maintain your vehicle properly may void the warranty, increase
your repair cost, reduce vehicle performance and operational capabilities
and adversely affect driver and passenger safety. Frequent inspection of
vehicle chassis components is recommended if the vehicle is subjected to
heavy off-highway usage.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
If driving through deep or standing
water is unavoidable, proceed very
slowly especially when the depth is
not known. Never drive through
water that is higher than the bottom
of the wheel rims (for cars) or the
bottom of the hubs (for trucks).
When driving through water, traction or brake capability may be limited.
Also, water may enter your engine’s air intake and severely damage your
engine or your vehicle may stall. Driving through deep water where
the transmission vent tube is submerged may allow water into the
transmission and cause internal transmission damage.
Once through the water, always dry the brakes by moving your
vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.
Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as quickly as dry brakes.
220
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Getting roadside assistance
To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern, Ford Motor
Company offers a complimentary roadside assistance program. This
program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The service
is available:
• 24–hours, seven days a week
• for the coverage period listed on the Roadside Assistance Card
included in your Owner Guide portfolio.
Roadside assistance will cover:
• a flat tire change with a good spare (except vehicles that have been
supplied with a tire inflation kit)
• battery jump start
• lock-out assistance (key replacement cost is the customer’s
responsibility)
• fuel delivery – Independent Service Contractors, if not prohibited by
state, local or municipal law shall deliver up to 2.0 gallons (7.5L) of
gasoline or 5 gallons (18.9L) of diesel fuel to a disabled vehicle. Fuel
delivery service is limited to two no-charge occurrences within a
12-month period.
• winch out – available within 100 feet (30.5 meters) of a paved or
county maintained road, no recoveries.
• towing – Ford/Mercury/Lincoln eligible vehicle towed to an authorized
dealer within 35 miles (56.3 km) of the disablement location or to the
nearest authorized dealer. If a member requests to be towed to an
authorized dealer more than 35 miles (56.3 km) from the disablement
location, the member shall be responsible for any mileage costs in
excess of 35 miles (56.3 km).
Trailers shall be covered up to $200 if the disabled eligible vehicle
requires service at the nearest authorized dealer. If the trailer is disabled,
but the towing vehicle is operational, the trailer does not qualify for any
roadside services.
221
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Canadian customers refer to your Customer Information Guide
for information on:
• coverage period
• exact fuel amounts
• towing of your disabled vehicle
• emergency travel expense reimbursement
• travel planning benefits
In Canada, for uninterrupted Roadside Assistance coverage, you may
purchase extended coverage prior to your Basic Warranty’s Roadside
Assistance expiring. For more information and enrollment, contact
1–877–294–2582 or visit our website at www.ford.ca.
Using roadside assistance
Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference. In the United States, this card is found in the
Owner Guide portfolio in the glove compartment. In Canada, the card is
found in the Customer Information Guide in the glove compartment.
U.S. Ford, Mercury and Lincoln vehicle customers who require Roadside
Assistance, call 1-800-241-3673.
Canadian customers who require roadside assistance, call
1-800-665-2006.
If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself, Ford Motor
Company will reimburse a reasonable amount for towing to the nearest
dealership within 35 miles. To obtain reimbursement information, U.S.
Ford, Mercury and Lincoln vehicle customers call 1-800-241-3673.
Customers will be asked to submit their original receipts.
Canadian customers who need to obtain reimbursement information, call
1–800–665–2006.
HAZARD FLASHER CONTROL
The hazard flasher is located on the
instrument panel by the radio. The
hazard flashers will operate when
the ignition is in any position or if
the key is not in the ignition.
Push in the flasher control and all
front and rear direction signals will flash. Press the flasher control again
to turn them off. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is creating a
safety hazard for other motorists.
Note: With extended use, the flasher may run down your battery.
222
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
FUEL PUMP SHUT-OFF SWITCH
This device stops the electric fuel pump from sending fuel to the engine
when your vehicle has had a substantial jolt.
After an accident, if the engine cranks but does not start, this switch
may have been activated.
The fuel pump shut-off switch is
located in the front passenger
footwell area in the right upper
corner.
To reset the switch:
1. Turn the ignition to the off
position.
2. Check the fuel system for leaks.
3. If no leaks are apparent, reset the
switch by pushing in on the reset
button.
4. Turn the ignition to the on
position.
5. Wait a few seconds and return
the key to off position.
6. Make another check for leaks.
FUSES AND RELAYS
Fuses
If electrical components in the
vehicle are not working, a fuse may
have blown. Blown fuses are
identified by a broken wire within
the fuse. Check the appropriate
fuses before replacing any electrical
components.
15
Note: Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage
rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire
damage and could start a fire.
223
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Standard fuse amperage rating and color
COLOR
Fuse
rating
Mini
fuses
Standard
fuses
Maxi
fuses
2A
3A
4A
5A
7.5A
10A
15A
20A
25A
30A
40A
50A
60A
70A
80A
Grey
Violet
Pink
Tan
Brown
Red
Blue
Yellow
Natural
Green
—
—
—
—
—
Grey
Violet
Pink
Tan
Brown
Red
Blue
Yellow
Natural
Green
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Yellow
—
Green
Orange
Red
Blue
Tan
Natural
Cartridge
Fuse link
maxi
cartridge
fuses
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Blue
Blue
—
—
Pink
Pink
Green
Green
Red
Red
Yellow
Yellow
—
Brown
Black
Black
Passenger compartment fuse panel
The fuse panel is located below and to the left of the steering wheel by
the brake pedal. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses.
To remove a fuse use the fuse puller tool provided on the fuse panel
cover.
224
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
The fuses are coded as follows.
Fuse/Relay
Location
1
Fuse Amp
Rating
10A
2
3
20A
15A
4
15A
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
—
—
—
30A
10A
30A
15A
Protected Circuits
Backup lamps (automatic
transmission), Electrochromatic
mirror
Horns
Battery saver: Interior lamps, Puddle
lamps, Trunk lamp, Power windows
Parklamps, Side markers, License
plate lamps
Not used
Not used
Not used
Rear window defroster
Heated mirrors
Starter coil, PCM
High beams
225
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Fuse/Relay
Location
12
Fuse Amp
Rating
7.5A
13
7.5A
14
15
16
15A
20A
15A
17
18
19
20
20A
20A
7.5A
7.5A
21
22
23
24
7.5A
7.5A
7.5A
7.5A
25
26
7.5A
7.5A
27
28
7.5A
10A
C/B
30A Circuit
Breaker
226
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Protected Circuits
Delay accessories: Radio head units,
Moon roof, Lock switch illumination,
Electrochromatic mirrors, Ambient
lighting
Cluster, Analog clock, Climate control
head units
Washer pump
Cigar lighter
Door lock actuator, Decklid lock
solenoid
Subwoofer
Radio head units, OBDII connector
Not used (Spare)
Power mirrors, Satellite radio module,
All wheel drive
Stop lamps, CHMSL
Audio
Wiper relay coil, Cluster logic
OCS (Passenger’s seat), PAD
indicator
RCM
PATS Transceiver, Brake shift
interlock solenoid, Brake pedal
switch, Automatic transmission relay
coil, Reverse switch (back-up lamps
for manual transmission)
Cluster, Climate control head units
ABS/Traction Control, Heated seats,
Compass, Reverse sensing system
Moon roof power, Delayed accessory
(SJB fuse 12, power window)
Roadside Emergencies
Power distribution box
The power distribution box is located in the engine compartment. The
power distribution box contains high-current fuses that protect your
vehicle’s main electrical systems from overloads.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery before servicing high
current fuses.
WARNING: To reduce risk of electrical shock, always replace
the cover to the Power Distribution Box before reconnecting the
battery or refilling fluid reservoirs.
If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, refer to the
Battery section of the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
1
28
41
29
42
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13 14 15 16 17
18
19
20
21
22
23 24 25 26 27
32
33
34
30
31
43
44
35
45 46 47 48 49
36
37
38
39
40
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
The high-current fuses are coded as follows.
Fuse/Relay
Location
1
Fuse Amp
Rating
60A***
2
60A***
Protected Circuits
SJB power feed (fuses 12, 13, 14,
15, 16, 17, 18, C/B)
SJB power feed (fuses 1, 2, 4, 10,
11)
227
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Fuse/Relay
Location
3
4
5
6
Fuse Amp
Rating
40A**
40A**
—
40A**
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
40A**
40A**
20A**
30A**
20A**
—
10A*
15A*
—
15A*
10A*
—
40A**
20
21
22
23
—
—
20A**
10A*
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
15A*
10A*
—
—
60A***
—
30A**
228
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Protected Circuits
Powertrain power, PCM relay coil
Blower motor
Not used
Rear window defroster, Heated
mirrors
PETA Pump (PZEV) power feed
ABS pump
Wipers
ABS Valves
Heated seats
Not used
SYNC
Ignition switch
Not used
Transmission
Alternator sense
Not used
Logic feed to SJB (solid state
devices)
Not used
Not used
Console power point
PCM KAM, FNR5 and canister
vent solenoid
Fog lamps
A/C Compressor clutch
Not used
Not used
Engine cooling fan
Not used
Fuel pump/injectors relay
Roadside Emergencies
Fuse/Relay
Location
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
Fuse Amp
Rating
—
30A**
20A**
—
—
1A*
1A*
—
—
—
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
5A*
15A*
15A*
15A*
15A*
—
—
Full ISO Relay
—
Full ISO Relay
Full ISO Relay
—
Full ISO Relay
High Current
Relay
*Mini fuses **A1 fuses ***A3 fuses
Protected Circuits
Not used
Driver power seat
Moon roof
Not used
Not used
PCM diode
One Touch Integrated Start
(OTIS) diode
Not used
Not used
Not used
Fog lamp relay
Wiper park relay
A/C clutch relay
FNR5 transmission relay
PETA Pump (PZEV) feedback
Injectors
PCM class B
Coil on plug
PCM class C
Not used
Not used
Blower relay
Not used
Fuel pump/injectors relay
Wiper RUN relay
Not used
PCM relay
PETA Pump (PZEV)
229
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
CHANGING THE TIRES
If you get a flat tire while driving, do not apply the brake heavily.
Instead, gradually decrease your speed. Hold the steering wheel firmly
and slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road.
Note: The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) indicator light will
illuminate when the spare tire is in use. To restore the full functionality
of the monitoring system, all road wheels equipped with tire pressure
monitoring sensors must be mounted on the vehicle.
Have a flat serviced by an authorized dealer in order to prevent damage
to the TPMS sensors, refer to Tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter. Replace the spare
tire with a road tire as soon as possible. During repairing or replacing of
the flat tire, have the authorized dealer inspect the TPMS sensor for
damage.
WARNING: The use of tire sealants may damage your Tire
Pressure Monitoring System and should not be used.
WARNING: Refer to Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter for important
information. If the tire pressure monitor sensor becomes damaged, it
will no longer function.
Dissimilar spare tire/wheel information
WARNING: Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an
increased risk of loss of vehicle control, injury or death.
If you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel, then it is intended for
temporary use only. This means that if you need to use it, you should
replace it as soon as possible with a road tire/wheel that is the same size
and type as the road tires and wheels that were originally provided by
Ford. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel is damaged, it should be
replaced rather than repaired.
A dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that
is different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels
and can be one of three types:
1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tire begins with the letter “T” for tire
size and may have “Temporary Use Only” molded in the sidewall
230
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
2. Full-size dissimilar spare with label on wheel: This spare tire has
a label on the wheel that states: “THIS TIRE AND WHEEL FOR
TEMPORARY USE ONLY”
When driving with one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above, do not:
• Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)
• Load the vehicle beyond maximum vehicle load rating listed on the
Safety Compliance Label
• Tow a trailer
• Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare
tire
• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire at a time
• Use commercial car washing equipment
• Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire
Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above at any one wheel
location can lead to impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking performance
• Comfort and noise
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs
• Winter weather driving capability
• Wet weather driving capability
3. Full-size dissimilar spare without label on wheel
When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel, do not:
• Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h)
• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire/wheel at a time
• Use commercial car washing equipment
• Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare
tire/wheel
The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel can lead to
impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking performance
• Comfort and noise
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs
• Winter weather driving capability
231
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
• Wet weather driving capability
• All-Wheel driving capability (if applicable)
• Load leveling adjustment (if applicable)
When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel additional
caution should be given to:
• Towing a trailer
• Driving vehicles equipped with a camper body
• Driving vehicles with a load on the cargo rack
Drive cautiously when using a full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel and
seek service as soon as possible.
Stopping and securing the vehicle
1. Park on a level surface, set the parking brake and activate the hazard
flashers.
2. Place the gearshift lever in P (Park) (automatic transmission) or R
(Reverse) (manual transmission) and turn the engine off.
Removing the spare tire and jack
1. Remove the carpeted load floor
panel located in the rear of the
vehicle and remove the lug wrench
and long bolt from the tool bag.
2. Remove the bolt securing the
spare tire using the lug wrench,
then lift and remove the spare tire
from the trunk.
3. Remove the jack retention bolt by
turning it counterclockwise and
remove the jack from the vehicle.
232
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Tire change procedure
WARNING: To help prevent the vehicle from moving when you
change a tire, be sure the parking brake is set, then block (in
both directions) the wheel that is diagonally opposite (other side and
end of the vehicle) to the tire being changed.
WARNING: If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or someone else
could be seriously injured.
WARNING: Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to
avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the
wheel.
Note: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is
being jacked.
1. Block both the front and rear of
the wheel diagonally opposite the
flat tire. For example, if the left
front tire is flat, block the right rear
wheel.
2. Remove the center ornament (if
equipped) from the wheel. Loosen
each wheel lug nut one-half turn
counterclockwise but do not remove
them until the wheel is raised off
the ground.
233
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
3. Put the jack in the jack locator
next to the tire you are changing.
Turn the jack handle clockwise until
the wheel is completely off the
ground.
Note: To avoid structural damage to
the vehicle, ensure that the jack is
centered between the two markings
(1) on the bottom of the rocker
flange.
WARNING: To lessen the
risk of personal injury, do
not put any part of your body
under the vehicle while changing a
tire. Do not start the engine when
your vehicle is on the jack. The
jack is only meant for changing
the tire.
4. Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench.
5. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire, making sure the valve stem is
facing outward. Reinstall lug nuts until the wheel is snug against the hub.
Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel has been lowered.
If you are using the temporary tire, the lug nut washers will not appear
to be flush with the rim. This is normal only when using the temporary
spare tire.
6. Lower the wheel by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.
234
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
7. Remove the jack and fully tighten
the lug nuts in the order shown.
Refer to Wheel lug nut torque
specifications later in this chapter
for the proper lug nut torque
specification.
8. Unblock the wheels.
1
3
4
5
2
Stowing the wheel and jack
1. Fully collapse the jack and place it back in the storage area in the
trunk.
2. Replace the jack retention bolt to secure the jack.
3. Place the tire in the storage bin in the trunk.
4. Replace the cover plate and bolt.
• When storing a flat road tire, flip the cover plate over and use the long
bolt.
• When storing the temporary spare tire, replace the cover plate and
use the short bolt.
5. Secure the bolt using the lug wrench.
6. Insert the lug wrench and bolt in the tool bag and place over the jack.
7. Replace the carpeted load floor panel.
WHEEL LUG NUT TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque at 500 miles (800 km)
after any wheel disturbance (tire rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel
removal, etc.).
Bolt size
Wheel lug nut torque*
lb. ft.
N•m
M12 x 1.5
100
135
* Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and
rust. Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners.
235
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
WARNING: When a wheel is installed, always remove any
corrosion, dirt or foreign materials present on the mounting
surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub, brake drum or
brake disc that contacts the wheel. Ensure that any fasteners that
attach the rotor to the hub are secured so they do not interfere with
the mounting surfaces of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct
metal-to-metal contact at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the
wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while the vehicle is in
motion, resulting in loss of control.
Note: Inspect the wheel pilot hole
prior to installation. If there is
visible corrosion in wheel pilot hole,
remove loose particles by wiping
with clean rag and apply grease.
Apply grease only to the wheel pilot
hole surface by smearing a “dime”
(1 square cm) sized glob of grease
around the wheel pilot surface (1)
with end of finger. DO NOT apply
grease to lugnut/stud holes or
wheel-to-brake surfaces.
JUMP STARTING
WARNING: The gases around the battery can explode if
exposed to flames, sparks, or lit cigarettes. An explosion could
result in injury or vehicle damage.
WARNING: Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin,
eyes and clothing, if contacted.
Do not attempt to push-start your automatic transmission
vehicle. Automatic transmissions do not have push-start
capability. Attempting to push-start a vehicle with an automatic
transmission may cause transmission damage.
236
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Preparing your vehicle
When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the
automatic transmission must relearn its shift strategy. As a result, the
transmission may have firm and/or soft shifts. This operation is
considered normal and will not affect function or durability of the
transmission. Over time, the adaptive learning process will fully update
transmission operation.
1. Use only a 12–volt supply to start your vehicle.
2. Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could
damage the vehicle’s electrical system.
3. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle
making sure the two vehicles do not touch. Set the parking brake on
both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving
parts.
4. Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive corrosion before
you attach the battery cables. Ensure that vent caps are tight and level.
5. Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect from any electrical
surges. Turn all other accessories off.
Connecting the jumper cables
+
+
–
–
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of
the discharged battery.
Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the
assisting (boosting) battery.
237
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
+
+
–
–
2. Connect the other end of the positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the assisting battery.
+
+
–
–
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal of the
assisting battery.
238
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
+
+
–
–
4. Make the final connection of the negative (-) cable to an exposed
metal part of the stalled vehicle’s engine, away from the battery and the
carburetor/fuel injection system. Do not use fuel lines, engine rocker
covers or the intake manifold as grounding points.
WARNING: Do not connect the end of the second cable to the
negative (-) terminal of the battery to be jumped. A spark may
cause an explosion of the gases that surround the battery.
5. Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades, belts, moving parts of
both engines, or any fuel delivery system parts.
Jump starting
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at
moderately increased speed.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been started, run both engines for an
additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables.
239
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Removing the jumper cables
+
+
–
–
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were
connected.
1. Remove the jumper cable from the ground metal surface.
Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the
assisting (boosting) battery.
+
+
–
–
2. Remove the jumper cable on the negative (-) connection of the
booster vehicle’s battery.
240
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
+
+
–
–
3. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the booster
vehicle’s battery.
+
+
–
–
4. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the
disabled vehicle’s battery.
After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables
removed, allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can
relearn its idle conditions.
241
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
WRECKER TOWING
If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact a professional towing
service or, if you are a member of a roadside assistance program, your
roadside assistance service provider.
It is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift or flatbed
equipment. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Ford Motor Company has not
approved a slingbelt towing procedure.
If the vehicle is towed by other means or incorrectly, vehicle
damage may occur.
If your vehicle is to be towed using wheel lift equipment, the non-lifted
wheels must be placed on a dolly to prevent damage to the vehicle.
Place a rag on top of the hoist cable below the fascia when loading or
unloading a vehicle on a flatbed wrecker to prevent surface damage to
the fascia.
Ford Motor Company produces a towing manual for all authorized tow
truck operators. Have your tow truck operator refer to this manual for
proper hook-up and towing procedures for your vehicle.
242
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Emergency towing
In case of a roadside emergency with a disabled vehicle (without access
to wheel dollies, car hauling trailer, or flatbed transport vehicle) your
vehicle (regardless of transmission powertrain configuration) can be flat
towed (all wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:
• Vehicle is facing forward so that it is being towed in a forward
direction.
• Place the transmission in N (Neutral). Refer to Brake shift interlock
in the Driving chapter for specific instructions if you cannot move the
gear shift lever into N (Neutral).
• Maximum speed is not to exceed 35 mph (56 km/h).
• Maximum distance is 50 miles (80 km).
243
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED
Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be performed by an authorized
Ford, Lincoln, or Mercury dealer. While any authorized dealer handling
your vehicle line will provide warranty service, we recommend you
return to your selling authorized dealer who wants to ensure your
continued satisfaction.
Please note that certain warranty repairs require special training and/or
equipment, so not all authorized dealers are authorized to perform all
warranty repairs. This means that, depending on the warranty repair
needed, you may have to take your vehicle to another authorized dealer.
A reasonable time must be allowed to perform a repair after taking your
vehicle to the authorized dealer. Repairs will be made using Ford or
Motorcraft parts, or remanufactured or other parts that are authorized by
Ford.
Away from home
If you are away from home when your vehicle needs service, contact the
Ford Customer Relationship Center or use the online resources listed
below to find the nearest authorized dealer.
In the United States:
Mailing Address
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48121
Telephone
1-800-392-3673 (FORD)
(TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952)
Online
Additional information and resources are available online at
www.genuineservice.com.
• U.S. dealer locator by Dealer Name, City/State, or Zip Code
• Owner Guides
• Maintenance Schedules
• Recalls
• Ford Extended Service Plans
• Ford Genuine Accessories
• Service specials and promotions.
244
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
In Canada:
Mailing Address (Ford vehicles)
Customer Relationship Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4
Telephone
1-800-565-3673 (FORD)
Online
www.ford.ca
Mailing Address (Lincoln vehicles)
Lincoln Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4
Telephone
1-800-387-9333
Online
www.lincolncanada.com
Additional Assistance
If you have questions or concerns, or are unsatisfied with the service you
are receiving, follow these steps:
1. Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your
selling/servicing authorized dealer.
2. If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved, contact the Sales
Manager, Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager.
3. If you require assistance or clarification on Ford Motor Company
policies, please contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center
In order to help you serve you better, please have the following
information available when contacting a Customer Relationship Center:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Your telephone number (home and business)
• The name of the authorized dealer and city where located
• The vehicle’s current odometer reading
In some states, you must directly notify Ford in writing before pursuing
remedies under your state’s warranty laws. Ford is also allowed a final
repair attempt in some states.
245
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
In the United States, a warranty dispute must be submitted to the BBB
AUTO LINE before taking action under the Magnuson-Moss Warranty
Act, or to the extent allowed by state law, before pursuing replacement
or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws. This dispute
handling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state created rights
or other rights which are independent of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty
Act or state replacement or repurchase laws.
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d) requires that, if a manufacturer
or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the
vehicle’s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of
attempts, the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the
vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and
reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or
payable by the consumer (less a reasonable allowance for consumer
use). The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund
or replacement vehicle.
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) presumes that the manufacturer
has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its
applicable express warranties if, within the first 18 months of ownership
of a new vehicle or the first 18,000 miles (29,000 km), whichever occurs
first:
1. Two or more repair attempts are made on the same non-conformity
likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR
2. Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity (a
defect or condition that substantially impairs the use, value or safety of
the vehicle) OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of
more than 30 calendar days (not necessarily all at one time)
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer must also notify the
manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the
following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126
246
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
THE BETTER BUSINESS BUREAU (BBB) AUTO LINE PROGRAM
(U.S. ONLY)
Your satisfaction is important to Ford Motor Company and to your dealer.
If a warranty concern has not been resolved using the three-step
procedure outlined on the first page of the Customer Assistance section,
you may be eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO LINE program.
The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of two parts – mediation and
arbitration. During mediation, a representative of the BBB will contact
both you and Ford Motor Company to explore options for settlement of
the claim. If an agreement is not reached during mediation and your
claim is eligible, you may participate in the arbitration process. An
arbitration hearing will be scheduled so that you can present your case
in an informal setting before an impartial person. The arbitrator will
consider the testimony provided and make a decision after the hearing.
You are not bound by the decision, but should you choose to accept the
BBB AUTO LINE decision, Ford must abide by the accepted decision as
well. Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE program are usually
decided within forty days after you file your claim with the BBB.
BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the information provided below,
please call or write to request a program application. You will be asked
for your name and address, general information about your new vehicle,
information about your warranty concerns, and any steps you have
already taken to try to resolve them. A Customer Claim Form will be
mailed that will need to be completed, signed and returned to the BBB
along with proof of ownership. Upon receipt, the BBB will review the
claim for eligibility under the Program Summary Guidelines.
You can get more information by calling BBB AUTO LINE at
1-800-955-5100, or writing to:
BBB AUTO LINE
4200 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 800
Arlington, Virginia 22203–1833
BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be requested by calling the Ford
Motor Company Customer Relationship Center at 1-800-392-3673.
Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility
limitations, modify procedures, or to discontinue this process at any time
without notice and without obligation.
247
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
UTILIZING THE MEDIATION/ARBITRATION PROGRAM
(CANADA ONLY)
For vehicles delivered to authorized Canadian dealers. In those cases
where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford of Canada and the
authorized dealer to resolve a factory-related vehicle service concern
have been unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada participates in an impartial
third party mediation/arbitration program administered by the Canadian
Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
The CAMVAP program is a straight-forward and relatively speedy
alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a
settlement have failed. This procedure is without cost to you and is
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal
proceedings.
In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party arbitrators conduct
hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal
environment. These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the
parties, make decisions and, when appropriate, render awards to resolve
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair, and final as the arbitrator’s
award is binding both to you and Ford of Canada.
CAMVAP services are available in all territories and provinces. For more
information, without charge or obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial
Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685.
FORD EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN
You can get more protection for your new car or light truck by
purchasing Ford Extended Service Plan (Ford ESP) coverage. It provides
the following:
• Benefits during the warranty period depending on the plan you
purchase (such as: reimbursement for rentals; coverage for certain
maintenance and wear items).
• Protection against covered repair costs after your Bumper-to-Bumper
Warranty expires.
You may purchase Ford ESP from any participating authorized dealer.
There are several plans available in various time, distance and deductible
combinations which can be tailored to fit your own driving needs. Ford
ESP also offers reimbursement benefits for towing and rental coverage.
When you buy Ford ESP, you receive Peace-of-Mind protection
throughout the United States and Canada, provided by a network of
more than 4,600 participating authorized dealers.
248
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
If you did not take advantage of the Ford Extended Service Plan at the
time of purchasing your vehicle, you may still be eligible. Since this
information is subject to change, please ask your authorized dealer for
complete details about Ford Extended Service Plan coverage options, or
visit the Ford ESP website at www.ford-esp.com.
GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND CANADA
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country, contact the
appropriate foreign embassy or consulate. These officials can inform you
of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel.
If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only get fuel with an anti-knock
index lower than is recommended for your vehicle, contact a regional
office or owner relations/customer relationship office.
The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without proper conversion may
damage the effectiveness of your emission control system and may cause
engine knocking or serious engine damage. Ford Motor Company/Ford of
Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper
fuel. Using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty importing your vehicle
back into the U.S.
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in
Central America, the Caribbean, or the Middle East, contact the nearest
authorized dealer. If the authorized dealer cannot help you, contact:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
FORD EXPORT OPERATIONS
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (313) 594-4857
FAX: (313) 390-0804
Email: expcac@ford.com
If you are in another foreign country, contact the nearest authorized
dealer. If the authorized dealer employees cannot help you, they can
direct you to the nearest Ford affiliate office.
If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate outside of
the U.S. or Canada, register your vehicle identification number (VIN) and
new address with Ford Motor Company Export Operations.
Customers in the U.S. should call 1-800-392-3673.
249
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER’S LITERATURE
To order the publications in this portfolio, contact Helm, Incorporated at:
HELM, INCORPORATED
P.O. Box 07150
Detroit, Michigan 48207
Or call:
For a free publication catalog, order toll free: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
Helm, Incorporated can also be reached by their website:
www.helminc.com.
(Items in this catalog may be purchased by credit card, check or
money order.)
Obtaining a French owner’s guide
French Owner’s Guides can be obtained from your authorized dealer or
by writing to:
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
Service Publications CHQ202
The Canadian Road
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, ON, Canada
L6J 5E4
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (U.S. ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a crash
or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and
if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Ford Motor
Company.
250
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov;
or write to:
Administrator
1200 New Jersey Avenue, Southeast
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (CANADA ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Transport
Canada, using their toll-free number: 1–800–333–0510.
251
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Cleaning
WASHING THE EXTERIOR
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral
pH shampoo, such as Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3-A), which is available
from your authorized dealer.
• Never use strong household detergents or soap, such as dish washing
or laundry liquid. These products can discolor and spot painted
surfaces.
• Never wash a vehicle that is “hot to the touch” or during exposure to
strong, direct sunlight.
• Always use a clean sponge or car wash mitt with plenty of water for
best results.
• Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to
eliminate water spotting.
• It is especially important to wash the vehicle regularly during the
winter months, as dirt and road salt are difficult to remove and cause
damage to the vehicle.
• Immediately remove items such as gasoline, diesel fuel, bird droppings
and insect deposits because they can cause damage to the vehicle’s
paintwork and trim over time. Use Bug and Tar Remover (ZC-42)
which is available from your authorized dealer.
• Remove any exterior accessories, such as antennas, before entering a
car wash.
• Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage any painted
surface; if these substances come in contact with your vehicle,
wash off as soon as possible.
Exterior chrome
• Wash the vehicle first, using cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH
shampoo, such as Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3-A).
• Use Custom Bright Metal Cleaner (ZC-15), available from your
authorized dealer. Apply the product as you would a wax to clean
bumpers and other chrome parts; allow the cleaner to dry for a few
minutes, then wipe off the haze with a clean, dry rag.
• Never use abrasive materials such as steel wool or plastic pads
as they can scratch the chrome surface.
• After polishing chrome bumpers, apply a coating of Motorcraft
Premium Liquid Wax (ZC-53-A), available from your authorized dealer,
or an equivalent quality product to help protect from environmental
effects.
252
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Cleaning
WAXING
• Wash the vehicle first.
• Do not use waxes that contain abrasives; use Motorcraft Premium
Liquid Wax (ZC-53-A), which is available from your authorized dealer,
or an equivalent quality product.
• Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with any non-body
(low-gloss black) colored trim, such as grained door handles, roof
racks, bumpers, side moldings, mirror housings or the windshield cowl
area. The paint sealant will “gray” or stain the parts over time.
PAINT CHIPS
Your authorized dealer has touch-up paint to match your vehicle’s color.
Take your color code (printed on a sticker in the driver’s door jamb) to
your authorized dealer to ensure you get the correct color.
• Remove particles such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
spots, road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips.
• Always read the instructions before using the products.
ALUMINUM WHEELS AND WHEEL COVERS
Aluminum wheels and wheel covers are coated with a clearcoat paint
finish. In order to maintain their shine:
• Clean weekly with Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37-A),
which is available from your authorized dealer. Heavy dirt and brake
dust accumulation may require agitation with a sponge. Rinse
thoroughly with a strong stream of water.
• Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims or
covers.
• Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your
wheel rims or covers. Chemical-strength cleaners, or cleaning
chemicals, in combination with brush agitation to remove brake dust
and dirt, could wear away the clearcoat finish over time.
• Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel
cleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household detergent.
• To remove tar and grease, use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover
(ZC-42), available from your authorized dealer.
253
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Cleaning
ENGINE
Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt
buildup keep the engine warmer than normal. When washing:
• Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine. The
high-pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause
damage.
• Do not spray a hot engine with cold water to avoid cracking the
engine block or other engine components.
• Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (ZC-20) on all parts
that require cleaning and pressure rinse clean. In Canada use
Motorcraft Engine Shampoo (CXC-66-A).
• Cover the highlighted areas to prevent water damage when cleaning
the engine.
• Never wash or rinse the engine while it is running; water in the
running engine may cause internal damage.
2.3L I4 ENGINE
254
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Cleaning
3.0L DOHC ENGINE
PLASTIC (NON-PAINTED) EXTERIOR PARTS
Use only approved products to clean plastic parts. These products are
available from your authorized dealer.
• For routine cleaning, use Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3-A).
• If tar or grease spots are present, use Motorcraft Bug and Tar
Remover (ZC-42).
• For plastic headlamp lenses, use Motorcraft Ultra Clear Spray Glass
Cleaner (ZC-23).
255
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Cleaning
WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES
The windshield, rear and side windows and the wiper blades should be
cleaned regularly. If the wipers do not wipe properly, substances on the
vehicle’s glass or the wiper blades may be the cause. These may include
hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes, water repellent
coatings, tree sap, or other organic contamination; these contaminants
may cause squeaking or chatter noise from the blades, and streaking and
smearing of the windshield. To clean these items, follow these tips:
• The windshield, rear windows and side windows may be cleaned with
a non-abrasive cleaner such as Motorcraft Ultra-Clear Spray Glass
Cleaner (ZC-23), available from your authorized dealer.
• The wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol or
Motorcraft Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate (ZC-32-A),
available from your authorized dealer. This washer fluid contains
special solution in addition to alcohol which helps to remove the hot
wax deposited on the wiper blade and windshield from automated car
wash facilities. Be sure to replace wiper blades when they appear
worn or do not function properly.
• Do not use abrasives, as they may cause scratches.
• Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint thinner to clean any parts.
If you cannot remove those streaks after cleaning with the glass cleaner
or if the wipers chatter and move in a jerky motion, clean the outer
surface of the windshield and the wiper blades using a sponge or soft
cloth with a neutral detergent or mild-abrasive cleaning solution. After
cleaning, rinse the windshield and wiper blades with clean water. The
windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse the windshield
with water.
Do not use sharp objects, such as a razor blade, to clean the
inside of the rear window or to remove decals, as it may cause
damage to the rear window defroster’s heated grid lines.
INSTRUMENT PANEL/INTERIOR TRIM AND CLUSTER LENS
Clean the instrument panel, interior trim areas and cluster lens with a
clean and damp white cotton cloth, then with a clean and dry white
cotton cloth; you may also use Motorcraft Dash & Vinyl Cleaner
(ZC-38-A) on the instrument panel and interior trim areas.
• Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase the gloss of the upper portion
of the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect the
driver from undesirable windshield reflection.
256
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Cleaning
• Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in
contact with certain products such as insect repellent and suntan
lotion in order to avoid possible damage to the interior painted
surfaces.
• Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the
finish of the instrument panel, interior trim and cluster lens.
WARNING: Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents
when cleaning the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid
contamination of the airbag system.
If a staining liquid like coffee/juice has been spilled on the instrument
panel or on interior trim surfaces, clean as follows:
1. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean, white, cotton cloth.
2. Apply Motorcraft Deluxe Leather and Vinyl Cleaner (ZC-11-A) [In
Canada use Motorcraft Multi-Purpose Cleaner (CXC-101)] to the wiped
area and spread around evenly.
3. Apply more Motorcraft cleaner to a clean, white, cotton cloth and
press the cloth onto the soiled area–allow this to set at room
temperature for 30 minutes.
4. Remove the soaked cloth, and if it is not soiled badly, use this cloth to
clean the area by using a rubbing motion for 60 seconds.
5. Following this, wipe area dry with a clean, white, cotton cloth.
INTERIOR
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats, safety belts and seats equipped with side
airbags:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.
• Remove light stains and soil with Motorcraft Professional Strength
Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54).
• If grease or tar is present on the material, spot-clean the area first
with Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover (ZC-14). In Canada, use
Motorcraft Multi-Purpose Cleaner (CXC-101).
• If a ring forms on the fabric after spot cleaning, clean the entire area
immediately (but do not oversaturate) or the ring will set.
• Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners, which can
stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of
the seat materials.
257
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Cleaning
WARNING: Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach or dye on the
vehicle’s safety belts, as these actions may weaken the belt
webbing.
WARNING: On vehicles equipped with seat-mounted airbags, do
not use chemical solvents or strong detergents. Such products
could contaminate the side-airbag system and affect performance of
the side airbag in a collision.
LEATHER SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)
Your leather seating surfaces have a clear, protective coating over the
leather.
• To clean, use a soft cloth with Motorcraft Deluxe Leather and Vinyl
Cleaner (ZC-11-A). In Canada, use Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner (CXC-93).
Dry the area with a soft cloth.
• To help maintain its resiliency and color, use the Motorcraft Deluxe
Leather Care Kit (ZC-11-D), available from your authorized dealer. In
Canada, use Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner (CXC-93) or an equivalent
high–quality leather care product.
• Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions, solvents or
cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl and plastics, or oil/petroleum-based
leather conditioners. These products may cause premature wearing of
the clear, protective coating.
Note: In some instances, color or dye transfer can occur when wet
clothing comes in contact with leather upholstery. If this occurs, the
leather should be cleaned immediately to avoid permanent staining.
UNDERBODY
Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently. Keep body and
door drain holes free from packed dirt.
258
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Cleaning
FORD AND LINCOLN MERCURY CAR CARE PRODUCTS
Your Ford or Lincoln Mercury authorized dealer has many quality
products available to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes. These
quality products have been specifically engineered to fulfill your
automotive needs; they are custom designed to complement the style
and appearance of your vehicle. Each product is made from high quality
materials that meet or exceed rigid specifications. For best results, use
the following products or products of equivalent quality:
Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover (ZC-42)
Motorcraft Car Wash (Canada only) (CXC-83)
Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner (ZC-15)
Motorcraft Custom Clear Coat Polish (ZC-8-A)
Motorcraft Custom Vinyl Protectant (ZC-40-A)
Motorcraft Dash and Vinyl Cleaner (ZC-38-A)
Motorcraft Deluxe Leather and Vinyl Cleaner (U.S. only) (ZC-11-A)
Motorcraft Leather Care Kit (U.S. only) (ZC-11-D)
Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3-A)
Motorcraft Dusting Cloth (ZC-24)
Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (U.S. only) (ZC-20)
Motorcraft Engine Shampoo (Canada only) (CXC-66-A)
Motorcraft Multi-Purpose Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-101)
Motorcraft Premium Glass Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-100)
Motorcraft Premium Liquid Wax (ZC-53-A)
Motorcraft Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate (U.S. only)
(ZC-32-A)
Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54)
Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover (U.S. only) (ZC-14)
Motorcraft Tire Clean and Shine (ZC-28)
Motorcraft Triple Clean (U.S. only) (ZC-13)
Motorcraft Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (ZC-23)
Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-93)
Motorcraft Wash and Wax (Canada only) (CXC-95)
Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37-A)
259
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
SERVICE RECOMMENDATIONS
To help you service your vehicle, we provide scheduled maintenance
information which makes tracking routine service easy.
If your vehicle requires professional service, your authorized dealer can
provide the necessary parts and service. Check your Warranty
Guide/Customer Information Guide to find out which parts and
services are covered.
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids and service parts
conforming to specifications. Motorcraft parts are designed and built to
provide the best performance in your vehicle.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE
• Do not work on a hot engine.
• Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts.
• Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed
space, unless you are sure you have enough ventilation.
• Keep all open flames and other burning (cigarettes) material away
from the battery and all fuel related parts.
Working with the engine off
• Automatic transmission:
1. Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park).
2. Turn off the engine and remove the key.
3. Block the wheels.
• Manual transmission:
1. Set the parking brake, depress the clutch and place the gearshift in 1
(First).
2. Turn off the engine and remove the key.
3. Block the wheels.
Working with the engine on
• Automatic transmission:
1. Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park).
2. Block the wheels.
• Manual transmission:
1. Set the parking brake, depress the clutch and place the gearshift in N
(Neutral).
2. Block the wheels.
260
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
WARNING: To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and/or
personal burn injuries, do not start your engine with the air
cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running.
OPENING THE HOOD
1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood
release handle located under the
bottom of the instrument panel near
the steering column.
2. Go to the front of the vehicle and
release the auxiliary latch that is
located under the front center of
the hood.
3. Lift the hood and support it with the prop rod.
261
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
IDENTIFYING COMPONENTS IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT
2.3L I4 engine
1. Engine coolant reservoir
2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Engine oil dipstick
4. Brake/Clutch fluid reservoir
5. Transmission fluid dipstick (automatic transmission only)
6. Battery
7. Power distribution box
8. Air filter assembly
9. Coolant bleed valve
10. Power steering fluid reservoir
11. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
262
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
3.0L V6 Duratec engine
1. Engine coolant reservoir
2. Power steering fluid reservoir
3. Brake fluid reservoir
4. Transmission fluid dipstick (automatic transmission only)
5. Battery
6. Power distribution box
7. Air filter assembly
8. Coolant bleed valve
9. Engine oil dipstick
10. Engine oil filler cap
11. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
263
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the
level is low. In very cold weather, do
not fill the reservoir completely.
Only use a washer fluid that meets
Ford specification WSB-M8B16-A2.
Do not use any special washer fluid
such as windshield water repellent
type fluid or bug wash. They may
cause squeaking, chatter noise,
streaking and smearing. Refer to the
Maintenance product
specifications and capacities section in this chapter.
State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the
use of methanol, a common windshield washer antifreeze additive.
Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used
only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the
vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or washer system.
WARNING: If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below
40°F (5°C), use washer fluid with antifreeze protection. Failure
to use washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold weather could
result in impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or
accident.
Note: Do not put washer fluid in the engine coolant reservoir. Washer
fluid placed in the cooling system may harm engine and cooling system
components.
264
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES
1. Pull the wiper arm away from the
vehicle. Turn the blade at an angle
from the wiper arm. Push the lock
pin manually to release the blade
and pull the wiper blade down
toward the windshield to remove it
from the arm.
2. Attach the new wiper to the
wiper arm and press it into place
until a click is heard.
Replace wiper blades at least once per year for optimum performance.
Poor wiper quality can be improved by cleaning the wiper blades and the
windshield, refer to Windows and wiper blades in the Cleaning
chapter.
To prolong the life of the wiper blades, it is highly recommended to
scrape off the ice on the windshield before turning on the wipers. The
layer of ice has many sharp edges and can damage the micro edge of the
wiper rubber element.
ENGINE OIL
Checking the engine oil
Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate
intervals for checking the engine oil.
1. Make sure the vehicle is on level ground.
2. Turn the engine off and wait a few minutes for the oil to drain into the
oil pan.
3. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P
(Park) (automatic transmissions) or 1 (First) (manual transmissions).
4. Open the hood. Protect yourself from engine heat.
5. Locate and carefully remove the engine oil level dipstick.
265
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
• 2.3L I4 engine
• 3.0L DOHC V6 Duratec engine
6. Wipe the dipstick clean. Insert the dipstick fully, then remove it again.
On 2.3L I4 engine, be sure the
notch in the dipstick flange is
aligned with the V on the engine
when reinserting it.
266
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
• 2.3L I4 engine
• 3.0L DOHC V6 Duratec engine
•If the oil level is within this range, the oil level is acceptable. DO
NOT ADD OIL.
• 2.3L I4 engine
• 3.0L DOHC V6 Duratec engine
•If the oil level is below this mark, engine oil must be added to raise
the level within the normal operating range.
• 2.3L I4 engine
267
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
• 3.0L DOHC V6 Duratec engine
• If required, add engine oil to the engine. Refer to Adding engine oil
in this chapter.
• 2.3L I4 engine
• 3.0L DOHC V6 Duratec engine
•Do not overfill the engine with oil. Oil levels above this mark
may cause engine damage. If the engine is overfilled, some oil must be
removed from the engine by an authorized dealer.
7. Put the dipstick back in and ensure it is fully seated.
On 2.3L I4 engine, be sure the
notch in the dipstick flange is
aligned with the V on the engine
when it is reinserted.
268
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Adding engine oil
1. Check the engine oil. For instructions, refer to Checking the engine
oil in this chapter.
2. If the engine oil level is not within the normal operating range, add
only certified engine oil of the recommended viscosity. Remove the
engine oil filler cap and use a funnel to pour the engine oil into the
opening.
3. Recheck the engine oil level. Make sure the oil level is not above the
normal operating range on the engine oil level dipstick.
4. Install the dipstick and ensure it is fully seated.
5. Fully install the engine oil filler cap by turning the filler cap clockwise
until it stops.
To avoid possible oil loss, DO NOT operate the vehicle with the
engine oil level dipstick and/or the engine oil filler cap removed.
Engine oil and filter recommendations
Look for this certification
trademark.
Use SAE 5W-20 engine oil
Only use oils “Certified For Gasoline Engines” by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). An oil with this trademark symbol conforms
to the current engine and emission system protection standards and fuel
economy requirements of the International Lubricant Standardization and
Approval Committee (ILSAC), comprised of U.S. and Japanese
automobile manufacturers.
To protect your engine and engine’s warranty, use Motorcraft SAE 5W-20
or an equivalent SAE 5W-20 oil meeting Ford specification
WSS-M2C930-A. SAE 5W-20 oil provides optimum fuel economy and
durability performance meeting all requirements for your
vehicle’s engine.
269
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives, cleaners or other engine
treatments. They are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that
is not covered by Ford warranty.
Change your engine oil and filter according to the appropriate schedule
listed in scheduled maintenance information.
When changing the oil filter on the 2.3L engine, you must also replace
the filter cap O-ring. The oil filter drain plug O-ring must also be
replaced whenever the oil filter drain plug is removed. Reuse of the
O-rings may cause engine oil leakage and may result in severe engine
damage. The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the
engine if the O-rings are not replaced.
Ford production and Motorcraft replacement oil filters are designed for
added engine protection and long life. If a replacement oil filter is used
that does not meet Ford material and design specifications, start-up
engine noises or knock may be experienced.
It is recommended you use the appropriate Motorcraft oil filter or
another with equivalent performance for your engine application.
BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a
Motorcraft maintenance-free battery
which normally does not require
additional water during its life of
service.
If your battery has a cover/shield, make sure it is reinstalled
after the battery has been cleaned or replaced.
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery clean and
dry. Also, make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to
the battery terminals.
If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the cables
from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. You can neutralize the
acid with a solution of baking soda and water.
270
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
It is recommended that the negative battery cable terminal be
disconnected from the battery if you plan to store your vehicle for an
extended period of time. This will minimize the discharge of your battery
during storage.
Note: Electrical or electronic accessories or components added to
the vehicle by the dealer or the owner may adversely affect
battery performance and durability.
WARNING: Batteries normally produce explosive gases which
can cause personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks
or lighted substances to come near the battery. When working near the
battery, always shield your face and protect your eyes. Always provide
proper ventilation.
WARNING: When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive
pressure on the end walls could cause acid to flow through the
vent caps, resulting in personal injury and/or damage to the vehicle or
battery. Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on
opposite corners.
WARNING: Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries
contain sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing.
Shield your eyes when working near the battery to protect against
possible splashing of acid solution. In case of acid contact with skin or
eyes, flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and
get prompt medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a physician
immediately.
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.
Because your vehicle’s engine is electronically controlled by a computer,
some control conditions are maintained by power from the battery. When
the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the engine must
relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum driveability and
performance. To begin this process:
1. With the vehicle at a complete stop, set the parking brake.
2. Put the gearshift in P (Park) (automatic transmission) or the neutral
position (manual transmission), turn off all accessories and start the engine.
3. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature.
271
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
4.
5.
6.
•
RN
LE
TU
AD
RE
Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
Turn the A/C on and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
Drive the vehicle to complete the relearning process.
The vehicle may need to be driven 10 miles (16 km) or more to
relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy.
• If you do not allow the engine to relearn its idle trim, the idle
quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle
trim is eventually relearned.
When the battery is disconnected or a new battery installed, the
transmission must relearn its adaptive strategy. As a result of this, the
transmission may shift firmly. This operation is considered normal and
will not affect function or durability of the transmission. Over time the
adaptive learning process will fully update transmission operation to its
optimum shift feel.
If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed,
the clock and the preset radio stations must be reset once the battery is
reconnected.
• Always dispose of automotive
batteries in a responsible manner.
Follow your local authorized
standards for disposal. Call your
local authorized recycling center
to find out more about recycling
automotive batteries.
RECYCLE
ENGINE COOLANT
Checking engine coolant
The concentration and level of engine coolant should be checked at the
intervals listed in scheduled maintenance information. The coolant
concentration should be maintained at 50/50 coolant and distilled water,
which equates to a freeze point of -34°F (-36°C). Coolant concentration
testing is possible with a hydrometer or antifreeze tester (such as the
Rotunda Battery and Antifreeze Tester, 014–R1060). The level of coolant
should be maintained at the “FULL COLD” level or within the “COLD
FILL RANGE” in the coolant reservoir. If the level falls below, add
coolant per the instructions in the Adding engine coolant section.
272
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Your vehicle was factory-filled with a 50/50 engine coolant and water
concentration. If the concentration of coolant falls below 40% or above
60%, the engine parts could become damaged or not work properly. A
50/50 mixture of coolant and water provides the following:
• Freeze protection down to -34°F (-36°C).
• Boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
• Protection against rust and other forms of corrosion.
• Proper function of calibrated gauges.
When the engine is cold, check the
level of the engine coolant in the
reservoir.
COLD FILL RANGE
• The engine coolant should be at the “FULL COLD” level or within the
“COLD FILL RANGE” as listed on the engine coolant reservoir
(depending upon application).
• Refer to scheduled maintenance information for service interval
schedules.
• Be sure to read and understand Precautions when servicing your
vehicle in this chapter.
If the engine coolant has not been checked at the recommended interval,
the engine coolant reservoir may become low or empty. If the reservoir is
low or empty, add engine coolant to the reservoir. Refer to Adding
engine coolant in this chapter.
Note: Automotive fluids are not interchangeable; do not use engine
coolant, antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified
function and vehicle location.
Adding engine coolant
When adding coolant, make sure it is a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant
and distilled water. Add the mixture to the coolant reservoir, when the
engine is cool, until the appropriate fill level is obtained.
273
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
WARNING: Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot.
Steam and scalding liquids released from a hot cooling system
can burn you badly. Also, you can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts.
WARNING: Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer
fluid container. If sprayed on the windshield, engine coolant
could make it difficult to see through the windshield.
• Add Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant or equivalent
meeting Ford specification WSS-M97B51-A1. Refer to
Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter.
Note: Use of Motorcraft Cooling System Stop Leak Pellets or an
equivalent product meeting Ford specification WSS-M99B37-B6, may
darken the color of Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant from
yellow to golden tan.
Note: When adding more than 1 quart (1.0 liter) of coolant it is
necessary to use the coolant bleed valve. Failure to bleed the cooling
system when adding engine coolant may cause engine damage. Refer to
the Cooling section of the Workshop Manual.
• Do not add/mix an orange-colored, extended life coolant such
as Motorcraft Specialty Orange Engine Coolant, meeting Ford
specification WSS-M97B44-D, or DEX-COOL威 brand with the
factory-filled coolant. Mixing Motorcraft Specialty Orange Engine
Coolant or any orange-colored extended life product such as
DEX-COOL威 brand with your factory filled coolant can result in
degraded corrosion protection.
• A large amount of water without engine coolant may be added, in case
of emergency, to reach a vehicle service location. In this instance, the
cooling system must be drained and refilled with a 50/50 mixture of
engine coolant and distilled water as soon as possible. Water alone
(without engine coolant) can cause engine damage from corrosion,
overheating or freezing.
• Do not use alcohol, methanol, brine or any engine coolants
mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze (coolant). Alcohol
and other liquids can cause engine damage from overheating or
freezing.
• Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant. These
can be harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the engine
coolant.
274
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury, make sure the
engine is cool before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap.
The cooling system is under pressure; steam and hot liquid can come
out forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly.
Add the proper mixture of coolant and water to the cooling system by
following these steps:
1. Before you begin, turn the engine off and let it cool.
2. When the engine is cool, wrap a thick cloth around the coolant
pressure relief cap on the coolant reservoir (an opaque plastic bottle).
Slowly turn cap counterclockwise (left) until pressure begins to release.
3. Step back while the pressure releases.
4. When you are sure that all the pressure has been released, use the
cloth to turn it counterclockwise and remove the cap.
• 2.3L coolant bleed valve
• 3.0L coolant bleed valve
5. Open the coolant bleed valve on the back of the engine water outlet
for the 2.3L engine or the coolant bleed valve located on the upper
radiator hose for the 3.0L engine.
6. Fill the coolant reservoir slowly with the proper coolant mixture (see
above), to within the “COLD FILL RANGE” or the “FULL COLD” level on
the reservoir.
275
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
7. Close the bleed valve and reinstall the cap on the coolant reservoir.
Turn the cap until it is tightly installed to prevent coolant loss.
After any coolant has been added, check the coolant concentration.
Refer to the Checking engine coolant section. If the concentration is
not 50/50 (protection to –34°F [–36°C]), drain some coolant and adjust
the concentration. It may take several drains and additions to obtain a
50/50 coolant concentration.
Whenever coolant has been added, the coolant level in the coolant
reservoir should be checked the next few times you drive the vehicle. If
necessary, add enough 50/50 concentration of engine coolant and
distilled water to bring the liquid level to the proper level.
If you have to add more than 1.0 quart (1.0 liter) of engine coolant per
month, have your authorized dealer check the engine cooling system.
Your cooling system may have a leak. Operating an engine with a low
level of coolant can result in engine overheating and possible engine
damage.
Recycled engine coolant
Ford Motor Company does NOT recommend the use of recycled engine
coolant in vehicles originally equipped with Motorcraft Premium Gold
Engine Coolant since a Ford-approved recycling process is not yet
available.
Used engine coolant should be disposed of in an appropriate
manner. Follow your community’s regulations and standards for recycling
and disposing of automotive fluids.
Coolant refill capacity
To find out how much fluid your vehicle’s cooling system can hold, refer
to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter.
Fill your engine coolant reservoir as outlined in Adding engine coolant
in this section.
Severe climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates (less than –34°F [–36°C]):
• It may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration
above 50%.
• NEVER increase the coolant concentration above 60%.
• Increased engine coolant concentrations above 60% will
decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
276
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
• Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the
coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate
freeze protection at the temperatures in which you drive in the
winter months.
If you drive in extremely hot climates:
• It is still necessary to maintain the coolant concentration
above 40%.
• NEVER decrease the coolant concentration below 40%.
• Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will
decrease the corrosion protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
• Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will
decrease the freeze protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
• Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the
coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate
protection at the temperatures in which you drive.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme climates should use a 50/50
mixture of engine coolant and distilled water for optimum cooling system
and engine protection.
What you should know about fail-safe cooling (2.3L I4 engine only)
If the engine coolant supply is depleted, this feature allows the vehicle to
be driven temporarily before incremental component damage is incurred.
The “fail-safe” distance depends on ambient temperatures, vehicle load
and terrain.
How fail-safe cooling works
If the engine begins to overheat:
• The engine coolant temperature gauge will move to the H (hot) area.
• The
symbol will illuminate.
If the engine reaches a preset over-temperature condition, the engine
will automatically switch to alternating cylinder operation. Each disabled
cylinder acts as an air pump and cools the engine.
277
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
When this occurs the vehicle will still operate. However:
• The engine power will be limited.
• The air conditioning system will be disabled.
Continued operation will increase the engine temperature and the engine
will completely shut down, causing steering and braking effort to
increase.
Once the engine temperature cools, the engine can be re-started. Take
your vehicle to an authorized dealer as soon as possible to minimize
engine damage.
When fail-safe mode is activated
You have limited engine power when in the fail-safe mode, so drive the
vehicle with caution. The vehicle will not be able to maintain high-speed
operation and the engine will run rough. Remember that the engine is
capable of completely shutting down automatically to prevent engine
damage, therefore:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine.
2. Arrange for the vehicle to be taken to an authorized dealer.
3. If this is not possible, wait a short period for the engine to cool.
4. Check the coolant level and replenish if low.
WARNING: Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the
engine is running or hot.
5. Re-start the engine and take your vehicle to an authorized dealer.
Driving the vehicle without repairing the engine problem
increases the chance of engine damage. Take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
FUEL FILTER
Your vehicle is equipped with a lifetime fuel filter that is integrated with
the fuel tank. Regular maintenance or replacement is not needed.
278
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
WHAT YOU SHOULD KNOW ABOUT AUTOMOTIVE FUELS
Important safety precautions
WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an
overfilled tank may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire.
WARNING: The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel
filler cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait
until it stops before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise,
fuel may spray out and injure you or others.
WARNING: If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap,
excessive vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system
or cause the fuel cap to disengage in a collision, which may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death
if misused or mishandled.
WARNING: Gasoline may contain benzene, which is a
cancer-causing agent.
Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel:
• Extinguish all smoking materials
and any open flames before
refueling your vehicle.
• Always turn off the vehicle before
refueling.
• Automotive fuels can be harmful
or fatal if swallowed. Fuel such as gasoline is highly toxic and if
swallowed can cause death or permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed,
call a physician immediately, even if no symptoms are immediately
apparent. The toxic effects of fuel may not be visible for hours.
• Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind
can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation. In severe cases,
excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious
illness and permanent injury.
279
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
• Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If fuel is splashed in the eyes,
remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with water for 15 minutes and
seek medical attention. Failure to seek proper medical attention could
lead to permanent injury.
• Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin. If fuel is
splashed on the skin and/or clothing, promptly remove contaminated
clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Repeated or
prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation.
• Be particularly careful if you are taking “Antabuse” or other forms of
disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing gasoline vapors,
or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction. In sensitive
individuals, serious personal injury or sickness may result. If fuel is
splashed on the skin, promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap and
water. Consult a physician immediately if you experience an adverse
reaction.
WARNING: When refueling always shut the engine off and
never allow sparks or open flames near the filler neck. Never
smoke while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain
conditions. Care should be taken to avoid inhaling excess fumes.
WARNING: The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can
produce static electricity, which can cause a fire if fuel is
pumped into an ungrounded fuel container.
Refueling
•
•
•
•
•
•
WARNING: Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause
severe injuries. To help avoid injuries to you and others:
Read and follow all the instructions on the pump island;
Turn off your engine when you are refueling;
Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle;
Keep sparks, flames and smoking materials away from fuel;
Stay outside your vehicle and do not leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling your vehicle — this is against the law in some places;
Keep children away from the fuel pump; never let children pump
fuel.
280
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Use the following guidelines to avoid electrostatic charge build-up when
filling an ungrounded fuel container:
• Place approved fuel container on the ground.
• DO NOT fill a fuel container while it is in the vehicle (including the
cargo area).
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while
filling.
• DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill
position.
Fuel filler cap
Your fuel tank filler cap has an indexed design with a 1/4 turn on/off
feature.
When fueling your vehicle:
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Carefully turn the filler cap counterclockwise until it spins off.
3. Pull to remove the cap from the fuel filler pipe.
4. To install the cap, align the tabs on the cap with the notches on the
filler pipe.
5. Turn the filler cap clockwise 1/4 of a turn until it clicks at least once.
If the check fuel cap light
or a “check fuel cap” message comes on,
the fuel filler cap may not be properly installed. The light or message can
come on after several driving events after you’ve refueled your vehicle.
At the next opportunity, safely pull off of the road, remove the fuel filler
cap, align the cap properly and reinstall it. The check fuel cap
or “check fuel cap” message may not reset immediately; it may
light
or “check fuel
take several driving cycles for the check fuel cap light
cap” message to turn off. A driving cycle consists of an engine start-up
(after four or more hours with the engine off) followed by city and
highway driving.
or “check fuel cap”
Continuing to drive with the check fuel cap light
message on may cause the
light to turn on as well.
If you must replace the fuel filler cap, replace it with a fuel filler
cap that is designed for your vehicle. The customer warranty may
be void for any damage to the fuel tank or fuel system if the
correct genuine Ford, Motorcraft or other certified fuel filler cap
is not used.
281
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
WARNING: The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel
filler cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait
until it stops before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise,
fuel may spray out and injure you or others.
WARNING: If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap,
excessive vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system
or cause the fuel cap to disengage in a collision, which may result in
personal injury.
Choosing the right fuel
Use only UNLEADED fuel or UNLEADED fuel blended with a maximum
of 10% ethanol. Do not use fuel ethanol (E85), diesel, methanol, leaded
fuel or any other fuel. The use of leaded fuel is prohibited by law and
could damage your vehicle.
Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel or fuel additives with metallic
compounds, including manganese-based additives.
Note: Use of any fuel other than those recommended may cause
powertrain damage, a loss of vehicle performance, and repairs may not
be covered under warranty.
Octane recommendations
Your vehicle is designed to use
“Regular” unleaded gasoline with a
pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87.
We do not recommend the use of
(R+M)/2 METHOD
gasolines labeled as “Regular” in
high altitude areas that are sold with octane ratings less than 87.
87
282
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Do not be concerned if your engine sometimes knocks lightly. However, if
it knocks heavily under most driving conditions while you are using fuel
with the recommended octane rating, see your authorized dealer to
prevent any engine damage.
Fuel quality
If you are experiencing starting, rough idle or hesitation driveability
problems, try a different brand of unleaded gasoline. “Premium”
unleaded gasoline is not recommended for vehicles designed to use
“Regular” unleaded gasoline because it may cause these problems to
become more pronounced. If the problems persist, see your authorized
dealer.
Do not add aftermarket fuel additive products to your fuel tank. It
should not be necessary to add any aftermarket products to your fuel
tank if you continue to use high quality fuel of the recommended octane
rating. These products have not been approved for your engine and
could cause damage to the fuel system. Repairs to correct the effects of
using an aftermarket product in your fuel may not be covered by your
warranty.
Many of the world’s automakers approved the World-Wide Fuel Charter
that recommends gasoline specifications to provide improved
performance and emission control system protection for your vehicle.
Gasolines that meet the World-Wide Fuel Charter should be used when
available. Ask your fuel supplier about gasolines that meet the
World-Wide Fuel Charter.
Cleaner air
Ford endorses the use of reformulated “cleaner-burning” gasolines to
improve air quality, per the recommendations in the Choosing the right
fuel section.
Running out of fuel
Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse
effect on powertrain components.
If you have run out of fuel:
• You may need to cycle the ignition from off to on several times after
refueling to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to
the engine. On restarting, cranking time will take a few seconds longer
than normal.
• Normally, adding 1 gallon (3.8L) of fuel is enough to restart the
engine. If the vehicle is out of fuel and on a steep grade, more than
1 gallon (3.8L) may be required.
283
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
• The Service engine soon
indicator may come on. For more
information on the Service engine soon
indicator, refer to
Warning lights and chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
ESSENTIALS OF GOOD FUEL ECONOMY
Measuring techniques
Your best source of information about actual fuel economy is you, the
driver. You must gather information as accurately and consistently as
possible. Fuel expense, frequency of fill-ups or fuel gauge readings are
NOT accurate as a measure of fuel economy. We do not recommend taking
fuel economy measurements during the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of
driving (engine break-in period). You will get a more accurate
measurement after 2,000 miles–3,000 miles (3,000 km–5,000 km).
Filling the tank
The advertised fuel capacity of the fuel tank on your vehicle is equal to
the rated refill capacity of the fuel tank as listed in the Maintenance
product specifications and capacities section of this chapter.
The advertised capacity is the amount of the indicated capacity and the
empty reserve combined. Indicated capacity is the difference in the
amount of fuel in a full tank and a tank when the fuel gauge indicates
empty. Empty reserve is the small amount of fuel remaining in the fuel
tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty.
The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and should
not be relied upon to increase driving range. When refueling your
vehicle after the fuel gauge indicates empty, you might not be
able to refuel the full amount of the advertised capacity of the
fuel tank due to the empty reserve still present in the tank.
For consistent results when filling the fuel tank:
• Turn the engine/ignition switch to the off position prior to refueling,
an error in the reading will result if the engine is left running.
• Use the same filling rate setting (low — medium — high) each time
the tank is filled.
• Allow no more than two automatic click-offs when filling.
• Always use fuel with the recommended octane rating.
• Use a known quality gasoline, preferably a national brand.
• Use the same side of the same pump and have the vehicle facing the
same direction each time you fill up.
284
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
• Have the vehicle loading and distribution the same every time.
Your results will be most accurate if your filling method is consistent.
Calculating fuel economy
1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading
(in miles or kilometers).
2. Each time you fill the tank, record the amount of fuel added (in
gallons or liters).
3. After at least three to five tank fill-ups, fill the fuel tank and record
the current odometer reading.
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer
reading.
5. Follow one of the simple calculations in order to determine fuel
economy:
Calculation 1: Divide total miles traveled by total gallons used.
Calculation 2: Multiply liters used by 100, then divide by total
kilometers traveled.
Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving (city
or highway). This will provide an accurate estimate of the vehicle’s fuel
economy under current driving conditions. Additionally, keeping records
during summer and winter will show how temperature impacts fuel
economy. In general, lower temperatures give lower fuel economy.
Driving style — good driving and fuel economy habits
Give consideration to the lists that follow and you may be able to change
a number of variables and improve your fuel economy.
Habits
• Smooth, moderate operation can yield up to 10% savings in fuel.
• Steady speeds without stopping will usually give the best fuel
economy.
• Idling for long periods of time (greater than one minute) may waste
fuel.
• Anticipate stopping; slowing down may eliminate the need to stop.
• Sudden or hard accelerations may reduce fuel economy.
• Slow down gradually.
• Driving at reasonable speeds (traveling at 55 mph [88 km/h] uses 15%
less fuel than traveling at 65 mph [105 km/h]).
285
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
• Revving the engine before turning it off may reduce fuel economy.
• Using the air conditioner or defroster may reduce fuel economy.
• You may want to turn off the speed control in hilly terrain if
unnecessary shifting between the top gears occurs. Unnecessary
shifting of this type could result in reduced fuel economy.
• Warming up a vehicle on cold mornings is not required and may
reduce fuel economy.
• Resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving may reduce fuel
economy.
• Combine errands and minimize stop-and-go driving.
Maintenance
• Keep tires properly inflated and use only recommended size.
• Operating a vehicle with the wheels out of alignment will reduce fuel
economy.
• Use recommended engine oil. Refer to Maintenance product
specifications and capacities in this chapter.
• Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance items. Follow the
recommended maintenance schedule and owner maintenance checks
found in scheduled maintenance information.
Conditions
• Heavily loading a vehicle may reduce fuel economy at any speed.
• Carrying unnecessary weight may reduce fuel economy (approximately
1 mpg [0.4 km/L] is lost for every 400 lb [180 kg] of weight carried).
• Adding certain accessories to your vehicle (for example; bug
deflectors, rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski/luggage racks) may
reduce fuel economy.
• Using fuel blended with alcohol may lower fuel economy.
• Fuel economy may decrease with lower temperatures during the first
8–10 miles (12–16 km) of driving.
• Driving on flat terrain offers improved fuel economy as compared to
driving on hilly terrain.
• Transmissions give their best fuel economy when operated in the top
cruise gear and with steady pressure on the gas pedal.
• Close windows for high speed driving.
EPA fuel economy estimates
Every new vehicle should have a window sticker containing EPA fuel
economy estimates. Contact your authorized dealer if the window sticker
286
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
is not supplied with your vehicle. The EPA fuel economy estimates
should be your guide for the fuel economy comparisons with other
vehicles. Your fuel economy may vary depending upon the method of
operation and conditions.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a
catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with
applicable exhaust emission standards. To make sure that the catalytic
converter and other emission control components continue to work
properly:
• Use only the specified fuel listed.
• Avoid running out of fuel.
• Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving, especially at
high speeds.
• Have the items listed in scheduled maintenance information
performed according to the specified schedule.
The scheduled maintenance items listed in scheduled maintenance
information are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle
and to its emissions system.
If other than Ford, Motorcraft or Ford-authorized parts are used for
maintenance replacements or for service of components affecting
emission control, such non-Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine
Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability.
WARNING: Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass
or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the
engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
indicator, charging system
Illumination of the Service engine soon
warning light or the temperature warning light, fluid leaks, strange odors,
smoke or loss of engine power could indicate that the emission control
system is not working properly.
An improperly operating or damaged exhaust system may allow exhaust
to enter the vehicle. Have a damaged or improperly operating exhaust
system inspected and repaired immediately.
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and
potentially lethal fumes into the passenger compartment.
287
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine. By
law, vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures, repairs, services,
sells, leases, trades vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not
permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent
it from working. Information about your vehicle’s emission system is on
the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the
engine. This decal also lists engine displacement.
Please consult your Warranty Guide/Customer Information Guide for
complete emission warranty information.
On board diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the engine’s
emission control system. This system is commonly known as the On
Board Diagnostics System (OBD-II). The OBD-II system protects the
environment by ensuring that your vehicle continues to meet
government emission standards. The OBD-II system also assists your
authorized dealer in properly servicing your vehicle. When the Service
engine soon
indicator illuminates, the OBD-II system has detected
a malfunction. Temporary malfunctions may cause the Service engine
indicator to illuminate. Examples are:
soon
1. The vehicle has run out of fuel—the engine may misfire or run poorly.
2. Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel—the engine may misfire or run
poorly.
3. The fuel cap may not have been securely tightened. See Fuel filler
cap in this chapter.
4. Driving through deep water—the electrical system may be wet.
These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank
with good quality fuel, properly tightening the fuel cap or letting the
electrical system dry out. After three driving cycles without these or any
other temporary malfunctions present, the Service engine soon
indicator should stay off the next time the engine is started. A driving
cycle consists of a cold engine startup followed by mixed city/highway
driving. No additional vehicle service is required.
indicator remains on, have your vehicle
If the Service engine soon
serviced at the first available opportunity. Although some malfunctions
detected by the OBD-II may not have symptoms that are apparent,
indicator on can
continued driving with the Service engine soon
result in increased emissions, lower fuel economy, reduced engine and
transmission smoothness, and lead to more costly repairs.
288
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing
Some state/provincial and local governments may have
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection could prevent
you from getting a vehicle registration. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M
indicator is on or not working
test if the Service engine soon
properly (bulb is burned out), or if the OBD-II system has determined
that some of the emission control systems have not been properly
checked. In this case, the vehicle is considered not ready for I/M testing.
indicator is on or the bulb does not
If the Service engine soon
work, the vehicle may need to be serviced. Refer to the On board
diagnostics (OBD-II) description in this chapter.
If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has just been serviced, or the
battery has recently run down or been replaced, the OBD-II system may
indicate that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. To determine if the
vehicle is ready for I/M testing, turn the ignition key to the on position
for 15 seconds without cranking the engine. If the Service engine
indicator blinks eight times, it means that the vehicle is not
soon
indicator stays on
ready for I/M testing; if the Service engine soon
solid, it means that the vehicle is ready for I/M testing.
The OBD-II system is designed to check the emission control system
during normal driving. A complete check may take several days. If the
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing, the following driving cycle consisting
of mixed city and highway driving may be performed:
15 minutes of steady driving on an expressway/highway followed by
20 minutes of stop-and-go driving with at least four 30-second idle
periods.
Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the
engine. Then, start the engine and complete the above driving cycle. The
engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature. Once started,
do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle is complete. If
the vehicle is still not ready for I/M testing, the above driving cycle will
have to be repeated.
POWER STEERING FLUID
Refer to scheduled maintenance information for the service interval
schedules.
289
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
• 2.3L I4 Engine
• 3.0L V6 Engine
1. Start the engine and let it run until it reaches normal operating
temperature (the engine coolant temperature gauge indicator will be
near the center of the normal area between H and C).
2. While the engine idles, turn the steering wheel left and right several
times.
3. Turn the engine off.
4. Check the fluid level in the reservoir. It should be between the
MIN/MAX or upper and lower lines. Do not add fluid if the level is in this
range.
5. If the fluid is low, add fluid in small amounts, continuously checking
the level until it reaches the range between the MIN/MAX or upper and
lower lines. Be sure to put the cap back on the reservoir. Refer to
Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter for
the proper fluid type.
BRAKE/CLUTCH FLUID
Brake and clutch systems are supplied from the same reservoir.
290
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
The fluid level will drop slowly as
the brakes wear, and will rise when
the brake components are replaced.
Fluid levels between the “MIN” and
“MAX” lines are within the normal
operating range; there is no need to
add fluid. If the fluid levels are
outside of the normal operating
range the performance of the
system could be compromised; seek
service from your authorized dealer
immediately.
MAX
MIN
TRANSMISSION FLUID
Checking 5–speed automatic transmission fluid (If equipped)
Refer to your scheduled maintenance information for scheduled
intervals for fluid checks and changes. Your transmission does not
consume fluid. However, the fluid level should be checked if the
transmission is not working properly, i.e., if the transmission slips or
shifts slowly or if you notice some sign of fluid leakage.
Automatic transmission fluid expands when warmed. To obtain an
accurate fluid check, drive the vehicle until it is warmed up
(approximately 20 miles [30 km]). If your vehicle has been
operated for an extended period at high speeds, in city traffic
during hot weather or pulling a trailer, the vehicle should be
turned off for about 30 minutes to allow fluid to cool before
checking.
1. Drive the vehicle 20 miles (30 km) or until it reaches normal operating
temperature.
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and engage the parking brake.
3. With the parking brake engaged and your foot on the brake pedal,
start the engine and move the gearshift lever through all of the gear
ranges. Allow sufficient time for each gear to engage.
4. Latch the gearshift lever in P (Park) and leave the engine running.
5. Remove the dipstick, wiping it clean with a clean, dry lint free rag. If
necessary, refer to Identifying components in the engine compartment
in this chapter for the location of the dipstick.
6. Install the dipstick making sure it is fully seated in the filler tube.
7. Remove the dipstick and inspect the fluid level. The fluid should be in
the designated areas for normal operating temperature.
291
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Low fluid level
Do not drive the vehicle if the fluid
level is below the lower notch on
the dipstick and the outside
temperatures are above 50°F
(10°C).
Correct fluid level
The transmission fluid should be checked at normal operating
temperature 149°F (65°C) on a level surface. The normal operating
temperature can be reached after approximately 20 miles (30 km) of
driving.
The transmission fluid should be in
between the notches if at normal
operating temperature 149°F
(65°C).
High fluid level
Fluid levels above the safe range
may result in transmission failure.
An overfill condition of transmission
fluid may cause shift and/or
engagement concerns and/or
possible damage.
High fluid levels can be caused by an overheating condition.
Adjusting automatic transmission fluid levels
Before adding any fluid, make sure the correct type is used. The type of
fluid used is normally indicated on the dipstick and also in the
Maintenance product specifications and capacities section in this
chapter.
Use of a non-approved automatic transmission fluid may cause
internal transmission component damage.
If necessary, add fluid in 1/2 pint
(250 mL) increments through the
filler tube until the level is correct.
292
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
If an overfill occurs, excess fluid
should be removed by an authorized
dealer.
An overfill condition of
transmission fluid may cause shift and/or engagement concerns
and/or possible damage.
Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives, treatments or
cleaning agents. The use of these materials may affect transmission
operation and result in damage to internal transmission components.
Checking 6–speed automatic transmission fluid (if equipped)
Refer to your scheduled maintenance information for scheduled
intervals for fluid checks and changes. Your transmission does not
consume fluid. However, the fluid level should be checked if the
transmission is not working properly, i.e., if the transmission slips or
shifts slowly or if you notice some sign of fluid leakage.
Checking automatic transmission fluid at normal operating
temperature (140°F-158°F [60°C-70°C])
Automatic transmission fluid expands when warmed. To obtain an
accurate fluid check, drive the vehicle until it is warmed up
(approximately 20 miles [30 km]) until the engine coolant gauge
indicates normal operating temperature. If your vehicle has been
operated for an extended period at high speeds, in city traffic
during hot weather or pulling a trailer, the vehicle should be
turned off for about 30 minutes to allow fluid to cool before
checking.
1. Drive the vehicle 20 miles (30 km) or until the coolant gauge indicates
normal operating temperature.
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and engage the parking brake.
3. With the parking brake engaged and your foot on the brake pedal,
start the engine and move the gearshift lever through all of the gear
ranges. Allow sufficient time for each gear to engage (approximately
10–15 seconds in each position).
4. Move the gearshift lever to P (Park) and leave the engine running.
5. Remove the dipstick, wiping it clean with a clean, dry, lint-free rag. If
necessary, refer to Identifying components in the engine compartment
in this chapter for the location of the dipstick.
6. Install the dipstick making sure it is fully seated in the filler tube.
293
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
7. Remove the dipstick and inspect
the fluid level. The fluid should read
within the hot range on the dipstick
if at normal operating temperature
(140°F-158°F [60°C-70°C]).
Checking automatic transmission fluid at cool temperature
(59°F-77°F [15°C-25°C])
If a fluid check is necessary at a low
fluid temperature (59°F-77°F
[15°C-25°C]), perform the check
using the cold range on the dipstick.
However, the fluid must be
re-checked at the proper fluid temperature.
Low fluid level
Do not drive the vehicle if the fluid
level does not show at all on the
dipstick.
Driving the vehicle with less than
the recommended fluid level may result in transmission failure. An under
fill condition of transmission fluid may cause shift and/or engagement
concerns and/or possible damage to the transmission.
High fluid level
Fluid levels above the normal
operating range may result in
transmission failure. An overfill
condition of transmission fluid may
cause shift and/or engagement
concerns and/or possible damage to
the transmission.
High fluid levels can be caused by an overheating condition.
Adjusting automatic transmission fluid levels
Before adding any fluid, make sure the correct type is used. The type of
fluid used is normally indicated on the dipstick and also in the
Maintenance product specifications and capacities section in this
chapter.
Note: Only one ATF fluid specification has been tested and approved for
use with the automatic 6-speed: Premium Automatic Transmission fluid.
Mercon fluids cannot be used with the automatic 6-speed without
damage or voiding warranty.
294
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Use of a non-approved automatic transmission fluid may cause
internal transmission component damage.
If necessary, add fluid in 1/2 pint (250 ml) increments through the filler
tube until the level is correct.
If an overfill occurs, excess fluid should be removed by an authorized
dealer.
An overfill condition of transmission fluid may cause shift and/or
engagement concerns and/or possible damage.
Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives, treatments or
cleaning agents. The use of these materials may affect transmission
operation and result in damage to internal transmission components.
Checking and adding manual transmission fluid (if equipped)
1. Park the vehicle on a level
surface.
2. Engage the parking brake fully –
put in first gear.
3. Ensure the vehicle cannot move.
4. Clean the filler plug.
5. Remove the filler plug and
inspect the fluid level.
6. Fluid level should be at bottom of
the opening.
7. Add enough fluid through the filler opening so that the fluid level is
within 3/8 inch (10mm) of the bottom of the filler hole with the vehicle
on a level surface.
8. Install and tighten the fill plug securely.
Use only fluid that meets Ford specifications. Refer to the Maintenance
product specifications and capacities section in this chapter.
AIR FILTER
Refer to scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate
intervals for changing the air filter element.
When changing the air filter element, use only the Motorcraft air filter
element listed. Refer to Motorcraft part numbers in this chapter.
295
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
WARNING: To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and/or
personal burn injuries do not start your engine with the air
cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running.
Changing the air filter element
• 2.3L I4 engine
• 3.0L DOHC V6 Duratec engine
1. Release the clamps that secure the air filter housing cover.
2. Carefully separate the two halves of the air filter housing.
• 2.3L I4 engine
296
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
• 3.0L DOHC V6 Duratec engine
3. Remove the air filter element from the air filter housing.
4. Wipe the air filter housing and cover clean to remove any dirt or
debris and to ensure good sealing.
5. Install a new air filter element. Be careful not to crimp the filter
element edges between the air filter housing and cover. This could cause
filter damage and allow unfiltered air to enter the engine if not properly
seated.
6. Replace the air filter housing cover and secure the clamps.
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter element may result in severe
engine damage. The customer warranty may be void for any damage to
the engine if the correct air filter element is not used.
MOTORCRAFT PART NUMBERS
Component
2.3L I4 engine
3.0L DOHC V6 Duratec
engine
FA-1786
BXT-40R
FL-500-S
Air filter element
FA-1785
Battery
BXT-96R
Oil filter
FL-2017-B1
2
PCV valve
3
Spark Plugs
1
When changing oil filter you must also replace the filter cap O-ring. The
oil filter drain plug O-ring must also be replaced whenever the oil filter
drain plug is removed. Reuse of the O-rings may cause engine oil leakage
and may result in severe engine damage. The customer warranty may be
void for any damage to the engine if the O-rings are not replaced.
2
The PCV valve is a critical emission component. It is one of the items
listed in scheduled maintenance information and is essential to the
life and performance of your vehicle and to its emissions system.
297
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
For PCV valve replacement, see your authorized dealer. Refer to
scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for
changing the PCV valve.
Replace the PCV valve with one that meets Ford material and
design specifications for your vehicle, such as a Motorcraft or
equivalent replacement part. The customer warranty may be void
for any damage to the emissions system if such a PCV valve is not
used.
3
For spark plug replacement, see your authorized dealer. Refer to
scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for
changing the spark plugs.
Replace the spark plugs with ones that meet Ford material and
design specifications for your vehicle, such as Motorcraft or
equivalent replacement parts. The customer warranty may be
void for any damage to the engine if such spark plugs are not
used.
298
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Capacity
Between MIN
and MAX on
reservoir
—
—
—
8.56 quarts
(8.1L)
9.72 quarts
(9.2L)
—
Item
Brake (and clutch–if
equipped) fluid
Door weatherstrips
Door latch, hood
latch, auxiliary hood
latch, door hinges,
striker plates, seat
tracks and fuel filler
door hinge
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Lock cylinders
Engine coolant 2.3L
engine
Engine coolant 3.0L
engine
Cooling system stop
leak pellets
Motorcraft Penetrating
and Lock Lubricant
Motorcraft Premium
Gold Engine Coolant
with bittering agent
(yellow-colored)1
Motorcraft Cooling
System Stop Leak
Pellets
Multi-Purpose Grease
Motorcraft High
Performance DOT 3
Motor Vehicle Brake
Fluid
Silicone Spray
Lubricant
Ford part name
MAINTENANCE PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS AND CAPACITIES
VC-6 /
WSS-M99B37-B6
VC-7-B /
WSS-M97B51-A1
XL-1 /
None
XG-4 or XL-5 /
ESB-M1C93-B
XL-6 /
ESR-M13P4-A
PM-1-C /
WSS-M6C62-A or
WSS-M6C65-A1
Ford part number / Ford
specification
Maintenance and Specifications
299
300
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
6.0 quarts
(5.7L)
—
Between MIN
and MAX on
reservoir
Engine oil 3.0L engine
Lock cylinders
Power steering fluid
Rear differential
(AWD) fluid
Automatic
transmission fluid
5-Speed
Automatic
transmission fluid
6-Speed
Motorcraft
MERCON威 V ATF
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20
Premium Synthetic
Blend Motor Oil (US)
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20
Super Premium Motor
Oil (Canada)2
Motorcraft Penetrating
and Lock Lubricant
Ford part name
3.0 quarts
(2.87L)3
Motorcraft 75W-90
gear oil
(non-synthetic)
Motorcraft FNR5
7.0 quarts
Automatic
(6.7L)4
Transmission Fluid
Motorcraft Premium
7.4 quarts
Automatic
(7.0L)4
Transmission Fluid
Motorcraft SAE
2.4 pints (1.15L) 80W-90 Premium Rear
Axle Lubricant
4.5 quarts
(4.25L)
Engine oil 2.3L engine
Manual transmission
fluid
Capacity
Item
XY-80W90-QL /
WSP-M2C197-A
XT-8-QAW /
WSS-M2C924-A
XT-9-QMM5 /
MAZDA M5
XT-4-QGL /
WSS-M2C203-A1 and GL-4
XT-5-QM /
MERCON威 V
XL-1/
None
XO-5W20-QSP (US)
CXO-5W20-LSP12 (Canada) /
WSS-M2C930-A with API
Certification Mark
Ford part number / Ford
specification
Maintenance and Specifications
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Fuel tank (AWD)
—
—
Motorcraft SAE
75W-140 Synthetic
Rear Axle Lubricant
Motorcraft Premium
Windshield Washer
Concentrate
Ford part name
—
—
ZC-32-A /
WSB-M8B16-A2
XY-75W140-QL /
WSL-M2C192-A
Ford part number / Ford
specification
See your authorized dealer for fluid level checking or filling of the Power Transfer Unit.
The Power Transfer Unit is lubricated for life with synthetic lube. Lubricant levels are not to be
checked or changed unless a leak is suspected or repair required. Replace Power Transfer Unit
lubricant with specified synthetic lubricant anytime the unit is submerged in water.
5
Indicates only approximate dry-fill capacity. Some applications may vary based on cooler size and
if equipped with an in-tank cooler. The amount of transmission fluid and fluid level should be set
by the indication on the dipstick’s normal operating range.
4
Service refill capacity is determined by filling the transmission within 3/8 inch (10mm) of the
bottom of the filler hole with the vehicle on a level surface.
3
Use of synthetic or synthetic blend motor oil is not mandatory. Engine oil need only meet the
requirements of Ford specification WSS-M2C930-A and the API Certification mark.
2
Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle.
1
4.75 quarts
(4.5L)
Windshield washer
fluid
17.5 gallons
(66.2L)
16.5 gallons
(62.4L)
12 ounces
(0.35L)
Power transfer unit
(PTU) fluid (AWD)5
Fuel tank (FWD)
Capacity
Item
Maintenance and Specifications
301
Maintenance and Specifications
ENGINE DATA
Engine
2.3L I4 engine
Cubic inches
Required fuel
Firing order
Ignition system
Spark plug gap
140
87 octane
1-3-4-2
Coil on plug
0.049–0.053 inch
(1.25–1.35 mm)
9.7:1
Compression ratio
Engine drivebelt routing
• 2.3L I4 Engine
• 3.0L V6 Engine
302
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
3.0L DOHC V6
Duratec engine
182
87 octane
1-4-2-5-3-6
Coil on plug
0.052–0.056 inch
(1.32–1.42 mm)
10.0:1
Maintenance and Specifications
IDENTIFYING YOUR VEHICLE
Safety Compliance Certification Label
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Regulations require
that a Safety Compliance
Certification Label be affixed to a
vehicle and prescribe where the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label may be located. The Safety
Compliance Certification Label is
located on the structure (B-Pillar)
by the trailing edge of the driver’s
door or the edge of the driver’s
door.
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
The vehicle identification number is
located on the driver side
instrument panel.
Please note that in the graphic,
XXXX is representative of your
vehicle identification number.
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
303
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) contains the following
information:
1. World manufacturer identifier
2. Brake system / Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) / Restraint
System
3. Vehicle line, series, body type
4. Engine type
5. Check digit
6. Model year
7. Assembly plant
8. Production sequence number
TRANSMISSION CODE DESIGNATIONS
You can find a transmission code on
the Safety Compliance Certification
Label. The following table tells you
which transmission each code
represents.
Description
5–Speed Manual Transmission A Mazda G5M
5–Speed Automatic Transmission Mazda FNR5
6–Speed Automatic Transmission Aisin F21
304
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Code
5
C
B
Accessories
GENUINE FORD ACCESSORIES FOR YOUR VEHICLE
A wide selection of Genuine Ford Accessories are available for your
vehicle through your local Ford or Ford of Canada dealer. These quality
accessories have been specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive
needs; they are custom designed to complement the style and
aerodynamic appearance of your vehicle. In addition, each accessory is
made from high quality materials and meets or exceeds Ford’s rigorous
engineering and safety specifications. Ford Motor Company will repair or
replace any properly dealer-installed Genuine Ford Accessories found to
be defective in factory-supplied materials or workmanship during the
warranty period, as well as any component damaged by the defective
accessories. The accessories will be warranted for whichever provides
you the greatest benefit:
• 12 months or 12,000 miles (20,000 km) (whichever occurs first), or
• the remainder of your new vehicle limited warranty.
Contact your dealer for details and a copy of the warranty.
The following is a list of several Genuine Ford Accessories. Not all
accessories are available for all models. For a complete listing of the
accessories that are available for your vehicle, please contact your dealer
or visit our online store at: www.fordaccessories.com.
Exterior style
Bug shields
Deflectors
Exterior trim kits
Splash guards
Interior style
All weather floor mats
Electrochromatic compass/temperature interior mirrors
Premium carpeted floor mats
Lifestyle
Ash cup / smoker’s package
Cargo organization and management
Peace of mind
Remote start
Vehicle security systems
305
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Accessories
Wheel locks
For maximum vehicle performance, keep the following information in
mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle:
• When adding accessories, equipment, passengers and luggage to your
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of
the front or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety
Compliance Certification label). Consult your authorized dealer for
specific weight information.
• The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) regulate the use of mobile
communications systems — such as two-way radios, telephones and
theft alarms - that are equipped with radio transmitters. Any such
equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with FCC or CRTC
regulations and should be installed only by a qualified service
technician.
• Mobile communications systems may harm the operation of your
vehicle, particularly if they are not properly designed for automotive
use.
• To avoid interference with other vehicle functions, such as anti-lock
braking systems, amateur radio users who install radios and antennas
onto their vehicle should not locate the Amateur Radio Antennas in
the area of the driver’s side hood.
• Electrical or electronic accessories or components that are added to
the vehicle by the authorized dealer or the owner may adversely affect
battery performance and durability.
306
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Index
A
Accessory delay ..........................73
AdvanceTrac ..............................200
Air cleaner filter ...............295–297
Air conditioning ....................47, 49
Airbag supplemental restraint
system ........................135, 144, 147
and child safety seats ............137
description ..............135, 144, 147
disposal ....................................150
driver airbag ............137, 145, 148
indicator light .........144, 146, 149
operation .................137, 145, 148
passenger airbag .....137, 145, 148
side airbag ...............................144
All Wheel Drive (AWD),
driving off road .........................215
Ambient mood/lighting ...............58
Antifreeze
(see Engine coolant) ................272
Anti-lock brake system
(see Brakes) ......................198–199
Anti-theft system ..............106, 110
arming the system ..................110
disarming a triggered
system .....................................111
triggering .................................111
Audio system
(see Radio) ......................17, 21, 29
Automatic transaxle
fluid, adding ............................291
fluid, checking ........................291
Automatic transmission
driving an automatic
overdrive .........................208–209
fluid, adding ....................293, 295
fluid, checking ................293, 295
fluid, refill capacities ..............299
fluid, specification ..................299
Auxiliary input jack (Line in) ....37
Axle
lubricant specifications ..........299
B
Battery .......................................270
acid, treating emergencies .....270
jumping a disabled battery ....236
maintenance-free ....................270
replacement, specifications ...297
servicing ..................................270
Belt-Minder威 .............................130
Booster seats .............................162
Brakes ........................................198
anti-lock ...........................198–199
anti-lock brake system (ABS)
warning light ...........................199
fluid, checking and adding ....290
fluid, refill capacities ..............299
fluid, specifications .................299
lubricant specifications ..........299
parking ....................................199
shift interlock ..........................206
Break-in period .............................5
Bulbs ............................................58
C
Capacities for refilling fluids ....299
Cassette tape player ...................21
Cell phone use ..............................7
Changing a tire .........................230
Child safety seats ......................154
attaching with tether straps ..160
in front seat ............................154
307
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Index
in rear seat ..............................154
LATCH .....................................157
recommendations ...................152
Child safety seats - booster
seats ...........................................162
Cleaning your vehicle
engine compartment ..............254
instrument panel ....................256
interior .....................................257
plastic parts ............................255
washing ....................................252
waxing .....................................253
wheels ......................................253
wiper blades ............................256
Climate control (see Air
conditioning or Heating) ......47, 49
Clock ............................................71
Clock adjust
6-CD in dash .............................31
AM/FM/CD .................................23
Clutch
fluid ..........................................290
operation while driving ..........211
recommended shift speeds ....212
Compass, electronic
set zone adjustment .................84
Console ........................................70
overhead ....................................70
Controls
power seat ...............................117
steering column ........................78
Coolant
checking and adding ..............272
refill capacities ................276, 299
specifications ..........................299
Cruise control
(see Speed control) ....................75
Cupholder(s) .............................121
308
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance ................221
Ford Extended Service
Plan ..........................................248
Getting assistance outside the
U.S. and Canada .....................249
Getting roadside assistance ...221
Getting the service you
need .........................................244
Ordering additional owner’s
literature .................................250
Utilizing the
Mediation/Arbitration
Program ...................................248
D
Daytime running lamps
(see Lamps) ................................54
Dipstick
automatic transmission
fluid ..................................291, 293
engine oil .................................265
Driving under special
conditions ..................210, 216, 218
sand .........................................217
snow and ice ...........................219
through water .................217, 220
E
Electronic message center .........81
Emergencies, roadside
jump-starting ..........................236
Emission control system ..........287
Engine ........................................302
cleaning ...................................254
coolant .....................................272
fail-safe cooling .......................277
idle speed control ...................270
lubrication specifications .......299
refill capacities ........................299
Index
service points ..................262–263
starting after a collision .........223
Engine block heater .................196
Engine oil ..................................265
change oil soon warning,
message center .......................265
checking and adding ..............265
dipstick ....................................265
filter, specifications ........269, 297
recommendations ...................269
refill capacities ........................299
specifications ..........................299
Event data recording ....................6
Exhaust fumes ..........................196
F
Fail safe cooling ........................277
Fluid capacities .........................299
Foglamps .....................................54
Four-Wheel Drive vehicles
driving off road .......................215
Fuel ............................................279
calculating fuel
economy ............................83, 284
cap ...........................................281
capacity ...................................299
choosing the right fuel ...........282
comparisons with EPA fuel
economy estimates .................286
detergent in fuel .....................283
filling your vehicle with
fuel ...........................279, 281, 284
filter, specifications ........278, 297
fuel pump shut-off switch .....223
improving fuel economy ........284
octane rating ...................282, 302
quality ......................................283
running out of fuel .................283
safety information relating to
automotive fuels .....................279
Fuel pump shut-off switch .......223
Fuses ..................................223–224
G
Gas cap (see Fuel cap) ............281
Gas mileage
(see Fuel economy) .................284
Gauges .........................................14
H
Hazard flashers .........................222
Headlamps ...................................53
aiming ........................................56
autolamp system .......................53
bulb specifications ....................59
daytime running lights .............54
flash to pass ..............................55
high beam .................................55
replacing bulbs .........................60
turning on and off ....................53
Heating
heating and air conditioning
system ...........................45, 47, 49
Hood ..........................................261
How to get going ........................17
I
Ignition ...............................193, 302
Illuminated visor mirror .............69
Infant seats
(see Safety seats) .....................154
Inspection/maintenance (I/M)
testing ........................................289
309
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Index
Instrument panel ........................71
cleaning ...................................256
cluster ........................................10
lighting up panel and
interior .......................................55
J
Jack ............................................230
positioning ...............................230
storage .....................................230
Jump-starting your vehicle ......236
K
Keyless entry system ...............105
autolock .....................................94
keypad .....................................105
locking and unlocking doors ..106
programming entry code .......105
Keys .....................................91, 108
positions of the ignition .........193
L
Lamps
autolamp system .......................53
bulb replacement
specifications chart ..................59
daytime running light ...............54
fog lamps ...................................54
headlamps .................................53
headlamps, flash to pass ..........55
instrument panel, dimming .....55
interior lamps ...........................57
replacing bulbs .........................60
LATCH anchors .........................157
Lights, warning and indicator ....10
anti-lock brakes (ABS) ..........199
Load limits .................................187
310
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Locks
autolock .....................................94
childproof ..................................97
doors ..........................................93
Lubricant specifications ...........299
Lug nuts ....................................235
Lumbar support, seats .............115
M
Manual transmission .................211
fluid capacities ........................299
lubricant specifications ..........299
reverse .....................................212
Message center .....................81–82
english/metric button ...............87
system check button ................86
warning messages .....................88
Mirrors ...................................74–75
automatic dimming rearview
mirror ........................................74
heated ........................................75
side view mirrors (power) .......75
Moon roof ....................................80
Motorcraft parts ........259, 278, 297
N
Navigation system .......................44
O
Octane rating ............................282
Oil (see Engine oil) ..................265
P
Parking brake ............................199
Parts (see Motorcraft parts) ....297
Index
Passenger Occupant
Classification Sensor .................122
Power distribution box
(see Fuses) ...............................227
Power door locks ........................93
Power mirrors .............................75
Power point .................................71
Power steering ..................205–206
fluid, checking and adding ....289
fluid, refill capacity ................299
fluid, specifications .................299
Power Windows ...........................72
R
Radio ................................17, 21, 29
Recommendations for
attaching safety restraints for
children ......................................152
Relays ........................................223
Remote entry system .........99–100
illuminated entry ............103–104
locking/unlocking
doors ................................100–101
opening the trunk ...................101
panic alarm .............................101
replacement/additional
transmitters .............................102
replacing the batteries ...........101
Reverse sensing system ...........213
Roadside assistance ..................221
S
Safety belts (see Safety
restraints) ..........121, 124, 126–129
Safety Canopy ...........................144
Safety defects, reporting ..250–251
Safety
restraints ...........121, 124, 126–129
Belt-Minder威 ...........................130
extension assembly ................129
for adults .........................126–128
for children .............................150
Occupant Classification
Sensor ......................................122
warning light and chime 129–130
Safety restraints - LATCH
anchors ......................................157
Safety seats for children ..........154
Safety Compliance
Certification Label ....................303
Satellite Radio Information ........42
Seats ..........................................112
child safety seats ....................154
front seats ...............................115
heated ................................49, 118
SecuriLock passive anti-theft
system ........................................106
Servicing your vehicle ..............260
Setting the clock
AM/FM/CD .................................23
AM/FM/In-dash 6 CD ................31
Side air curtain .........................147
Spark plugs,
specifications .....................297, 302
Specification chart,
lubricants ...................................299
Speed control ..............................75
Starting your
vehicle ........................193–194, 196
jump starting ..........................236
Steering
speed sensitive .......................206
311
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
Index
Steering wheel
controls ......................................78
tilting .........................................69
SYNC ............................................44
T
Tilt steering wheel ......................69
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS)
Tires, Wheels and Loading ....181
Tires ...........................166–167, 230
alignment ................................174
care ..........................................170
changing ..................................230
checking the pressure ............170
inflating ...................................168
label .........................................180
replacing ..................................172
rotating ....................................174
safety practices .......................173
sidewall information ...............175
snow tires and chains ............186
spare tire .................................230
terminology .............................167
tire grades ...............................167
treadwear ........................166, 171
Towing .......................................191
recreational towing .................191
trailer towing ..........................191
wrecker ....................................242
Traction control ........................204
Transaxle
fluid, checking and adding
(automatic) .............................291
312
2009 Fusion (fsn)
Owners Guide
USA (fus)
fluid, checking and adding
(manual) .................................295
Transmission .............................206
brake-shift interlock (BSI) ....206
fluid, refill capacities ..............299
lubricant specifications ..........299
manual operation ....................211
Trunk ...........................................98
remote release ..................90, 101
Turn signal ..................................57
U
USB port ......................................38
V
Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) ..........................................303
Vehicle loading ..........................187
Ventilating your vehicle ...........196
W
Warning lights (see Lights) .......10
Washer fluid ..............................264
Water, Driving through .............220
Windows
power .........................................72
Windshield washer fluid and
wipers ..........................................68
checking and adding fluid .....264
replacing wiper blades ...........265
Wrecker towing .........................242
Download PDF

advertising